1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK 2 3****************** 4Variables Glossary 5****************** 6 7This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build 8system and gives an overview of their function and contents. 9 10:term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>` 11:term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>` 12:term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>` 13:term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>` 14:term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P` 15:term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T` 16:term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>` 17:term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>` 18 19.. glossary:: 20 21 :term:`ABIEXTENSION` 22 Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU 23 canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi"). 24 25 ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the 26 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the 27 following extension: 28 :: 29 30 ABIEXTENSION = "eabi" 31 32 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` 33 Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty. 34 By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default 35 behavior can cause issues when there is an 36 :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime 37 requirement on the existence of the package. 38 39 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 40 conjunction with a package name override, as in: 41 :: 42 43 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1" 44 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1" 45 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1" 46 47 :term:`ALTERNATIVE` 48 Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming 49 scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages. 50 When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the 51 alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the 52 commands can co-exist. 53 54 To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist 55 as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package 56 has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you 57 identify them as follows: 58 :: 59 60 ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket" 61 62 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 63 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 64 section. 65 66 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` 67 Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual 68 locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the 69 ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must 70 use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual 71 location: 72 :: 73 74 ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/[" 75 76 In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``) 77 from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``. 78 79 .. note:: 80 81 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``. 82 83 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 84 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 85 section. 86 87 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY` 88 Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for 89 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 90 default regardless of the command name or package, a default for 91 specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default 92 for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the 93 available syntax forms: 94 :: 95 96 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority" 97 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority" 98 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority" 99 100 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 101 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 102 section. 103 104 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET` 105 Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for 106 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 107 default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the 108 command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands 109 regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to 110 particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms: 111 :: 112 113 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target" 114 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target" 115 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target" 116 117 .. note:: 118 119 If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value 120 from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable. 121 122 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the 123 same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``" 124 appended to it. 125 126 Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the 127 alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename 128 alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 129 task while retaining support for the command if necessary. 130 131 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 132 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 133 section. 134 135 :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES` 136 When inheriting the 137 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 138 class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where 139 at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order 140 for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words, 141 if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`` 142 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 143 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 144 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 145 146 147 :term:`APPEND` 148 An override list of append strings for each target specified with 149 :term:`LABELS`. 150 151 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 152 information on how this variable is used. 153 154 :term:`AR` 155 The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``. 156 157 :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE` 158 When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class, 159 determines the type of information used to create a released archive. 160 You can use this variable to create archives of patched source, 161 original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the 162 following variable flags (varflags): 163 :: 164 165 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original" # Uses original (unpacked) source files. 166 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched" # Uses patched source files. This is the default. 167 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured" # Uses configured source files. 168 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1" # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch. 169 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..." # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff. 170 ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1" # Uses environment data. 171 ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1" # Uses recipe and include files. 172 ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1" # Uses RPM package files. 173 174 For information on how the variable works, see the 175 ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`. 176 177 :term:`AS` 178 Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler. 179 180 :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED` 181 Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not 182 attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already 183 been built. 184 185 In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native 186 tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which 187 when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used 188 rather than building ``git-native``. 189 190 :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS` 191 Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which 192 adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the 193 system. Separate multiple entries using spaces. 194 195 As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of 196 shlibname in packagename with the optional version: 197 :: 198 199 shlibname:packagename[_version] 200 201 Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1`` 202 as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package: 203 :: 204 205 ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation" 206 207 :term:`AUTHOR` 208 The email address used to contact the original author or authors in 209 order to send patches and forward bugs. 210 211 :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS` 212 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 213 which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which 214 packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to 215 Debian library package naming. 216 217 The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to 218 act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe. 219 220 :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU` 221 Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You 222 must set this variable in your recipe. The 223 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable. 224 225 :term:`AUTOREV` 226 When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to 227 use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example: 228 :: 229 230 SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}" 231 232 If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of 233 software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains 234 ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you 235 have a kernel recipe that inherits the 236 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous 237 statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get 238 into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe 239 so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``. 240 241 For more information see the 242 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 243 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 244 245 :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` 246 List of licenses found in the directories specified by 247 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and 248 :term:`LICENSE_PATH`. 249 250 .. note:: 251 252 It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and 253 ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES`` 254 is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`). 255 256 :term:`AVAILTUNES` 257 The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) 258 tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build 259 system. 260 261 The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes 262 may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with 263 each other in a 264 :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>` 265 configuration. 266 267 To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the 268 "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the 269 "=" operator. See the 270 ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake 271 User Manual for more information. 272 273 :term:`B` 274 The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in 275 which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a 276 recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the 277 :term:`S` directory, which is defined as: 278 :: 279 280 S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}" 281 282 You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to 283 by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support 284 separating these directories. The build system defaults to using 285 separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes. 286 287 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` 288 Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only 289 packages are packages installed only through the 290 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any 291 of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them 292 with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable: 293 :: 294 295 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 296 297 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 298 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 299 override: 300 :: 301 302 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name" 303 304 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 305 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 306 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 307 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 308 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 309 310 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 311 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 312 313 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 314 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related 315 information. 316 317 :term:`BASE_LIB` 318 The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary 319 Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib 320 context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`" 321 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information 322 on Multilib. 323 324 The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in 325 the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not 326 being used, the value defaults to "lib". 327 328 :term:`BASE_WORKDIR` 329 Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default 330 value is "${TMPDIR}/work". 331 332 :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS` 333 Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed 334 to use to obtain the required source code. Following are 335 considerations surrounding this variable: 336 337 - This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set 338 or set to "0". 339 340 - Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of 341 host names exists. For example, the following setting matches 342 ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``. 343 :: 344 345 BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org" 346 347 .. note:: 348 349 The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of 350 a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the 351 host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 352 location of the name or combined with the front part of the 353 name. 354 355 For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar`` 356 is not. 357 358 - Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug. 359 360 - Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure. 361 362 Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with 363 :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host 364 you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being 365 fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a 366 host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI` 367 statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the 368 host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the 369 ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs. 370 371 :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY` 372 Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file 373 (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This 374 condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core`` 375 bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the 376 other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe 377 yet). 378 379 The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction 380 given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your 381 changes are no longer being applied. 382 383 You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1", 384 "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the 385 :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example: 386 :: 387 388 BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1" 389 390 :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 391 Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows 392 you to control the build based on these parameters. 393 394 Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring, 395 add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file 396 found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the 397 following form: 398 399 .. code-block:: none 400 401 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]" 402 403 where: 404 405 action is: 406 ABORT: Immediately abort the build when 407 a threshold is broken. 408 STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently 409 executing tasks have finished when 410 a threshold is broken. 411 WARN: Issue a warning but continue the 412 build when a threshold is broken. 413 Subsequent warnings are issued as 414 defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL 415 variable, which must be defined in 416 the conf/local.conf file. 417 418 dir is: 419 Any directory you choose. You can specify one or 420 more directories to monitor by separating the 421 groupings with a space. If two directories are 422 on the same device, only the first directory 423 is monitored. 424 425 threshold is: 426 Either the minimum available disk space, 427 the minimum number of free inodes, or 428 both. You must specify at least one. To 429 omit one or the other, simply omit the value. 430 Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes, 431 Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do 432 not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by 433 default. Do not use GB, MB, or KB. 434 435 Here are some examples: 436 :: 437 438 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 439 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G" 440 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K" 441 442 The first example works only if you also provide the 443 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 444 variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build 445 system to immediately abort when either the disk space in 446 ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops 447 below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the 448 variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space 449 in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number 450 of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued 451 during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` 452 variable. 453 454 The second example stops the build after all currently executing 455 tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}`` 456 directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free 457 inodes in this case. 458 459 The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of 460 free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No 461 disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case. 462 463 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 464 Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these 465 intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in 466 the :term:`Build Directory`. 467 468 If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you 469 must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 470 variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build, 471 subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free 472 inodes further reduces by the respective interval. 473 474 If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you 475 do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk 476 monitoring interval defaults to the following: 477 :: 478 479 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 480 481 When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the 482 following form: 483 484 .. code-block:: none 485 486 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval" 487 488 where: 489 490 disk_space_interval is: 491 An interval of memory expressed in either 492 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 493 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 494 495 disk_inode_interval is: 496 An interval of free inodes expressed in either 497 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 498 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 499 500 Here is an example: 501 :: 502 503 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 504 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 505 506 These variables cause the 507 OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the 508 available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of 509 free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` 510 directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time 511 a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1 512 Gbytes and 100 Kbytes). 513 514 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 515 Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git 516 repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the 517 :term:`DL_DIR` directory. 518 519 For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these 520 repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build 521 system. 522 :: 523 524 BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1" 525 526 Set this variable in your 527 ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 528 529 Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can 530 clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other 531 source control work directories. 532 533 :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 534 The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one 535 time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this 536 variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For 537 example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses 538 hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default 539 to "4". 540 541 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 542 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 543 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 544 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable 545 is not set higher than "20". 546 547 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 548 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 549 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 550 551 :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 552 Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake 553 server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how 554 long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations. 555 556 For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file 557 instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity: 558 :: 559 560 BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20" 561 562 If you want the server to never be unloaded, 563 set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1". 564 565 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` 566 Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the 567 software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like 568 ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build 569 system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to 570 run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target 571 :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK 572 machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form 573 "``multilib:``\ multilib_name". 574 575 To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of 576 code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe: 577 :: 578 579 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk" 580 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name" 581 582 .. note:: 583 584 Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe 585 variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such 586 as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of 587 a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten 588 to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native". 589 590 Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once. 591 Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not 592 possible to include a different file depending on the variant, 593 since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is 594 parsed. 595 596 :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS` 597 Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find 598 the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append 599 its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file. 600 601 :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN` 602 Variable that expands to match files from 603 :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable 604 is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the 605 name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``). 606 607 :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` 608 Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer. 609 610 This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears 611 in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to 612 prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe 613 - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple 614 layers. The precedence established through this variable stands 615 regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For 616 example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for 617 which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still 618 has a lower precedence. 619 620 A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a 621 higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence 622 than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable 623 is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable 624 for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a 625 layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1 626 if no priorities are defined). 627 628 .. tip:: 629 630 You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers`` 631 to list all configured layers along with their priorities. 632 633 :term:`BBFILES` 634 A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build 635 software. 636 637 When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's 638 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax. 639 For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the 640 previous link. 641 642 :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC` 643 Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify 644 the layers by the collections that the layers define. 645 646 Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files 647 whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to 648 modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to 649 introduce a hard dependency on those other layers. 650 651 Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``: 652 collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two 653 collection names and two filename patterns: 654 :: 655 656 BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \ 657 clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \ 658 core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \ 659 " 660 661 This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid 662 entries are found, which cause parsing to abort: 663 664 .. code-block:: none 665 666 ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not: 667 /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend 668 /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend 669 670 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` 671 Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure. 672 673 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES` 674 If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the 675 maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when 676 reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``, 677 the entire log is printed. 678 679 :term:`BBLAYERS` 680 Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined 681 in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 682 Here is an example: 683 :: 684 685 BBLAYERS = " \ 686 /home/scottrif/poky/meta \ 687 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \ 688 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \ 689 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \ 690 " 691 692 This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom, 693 user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``. 694 695 :term:`BBMASK` 696 Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files. 697 698 You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and 699 ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append 700 files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not 701 see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or 702 otherwise used by BitBake. 703 704 The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression 705 compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular 706 Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full 707 paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's 708 documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax. 709 710 The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell 711 BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the 712 ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory: 713 :: 714 715 BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/" 716 717 If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can 718 specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example 719 masks out multiple directories and individual recipes: :: 720 721 BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/" 722 BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/" 723 BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap" 724 BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend" 725 BBMASK += "lzma" 726 727 .. note:: 728 729 When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character 730 to ensure you match just that directory name. 731 732 :term:`BBMULTICONFIG` 733 Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are 734 building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in 735 your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a 736 multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For 737 example, the following line specifies three configuration files: 738 :: 739 740 BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC" 741 742 Each configuration file you 743 use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory` 744 ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g. 745 build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``). 746 747 For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment 748 that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the 749 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`" 750 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 751 752 :term:`BBPATH` 753 Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This 754 variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable. 755 756 .. note:: 757 758 If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the 759 Build Directory 760 , you must be sure to set 761 BBPATH 762 to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any 763 environment variable and then run BitBake: 764 :: 765 766 $ BBPATH = "build_directory" 767 $ export BBPATH 768 $ bitbake target 769 770 771 :term:`BBSERVER` 772 If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the 773 BitBake remote server. 774 775 Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake 776 environment: 777 :: 778 779 export BBSERVER=localhost:$port 780 781 By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in 782 :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`. 783 Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency 784 data. 785 786 :term:`BINCONFIG` 787 When inheriting the 788 :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class, 789 this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in 790 favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The 791 ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to 792 return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and 793 replaced. 794 795 To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example 796 from the ``libpng`` recipe: 797 :: 798 799 BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config" 800 801 :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB` 802 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 803 this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that 804 need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have 805 been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when 806 installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other 807 recipes. 808 809 .. note:: 810 811 The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses 812 `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__, 813 which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern 814 matching. Shell globbing is very similar to 815 `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__ 816 and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__. 817 818 For more information on how this variable works, see 819 ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 820 You can also find general 821 information on the class in the 822 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 823 824 :term:`BP` 825 The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name 826 suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is 827 comprised of the following: 828 :: 829 830 ${BPN}-${PV} 831 832 :term:`BPN` 833 This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with 834 common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``, 835 ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``. 836 The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the 837 :term:`MLPREFIX` and 838 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables, 839 respectively. 840 841 :term:`BUGTRACKER` 842 Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe. 843 The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the 844 variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being 845 built needs to be manually reported. 846 847 :term:`BUILD_ARCH` 848 Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The 849 OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the 850 machine name reported by the ``uname`` command. 851 852 :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH` 853 Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build 854 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty. 855 856 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` 857 Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build 858 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty. 859 860 :term:`BUILD_CCLD` 861 Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C 862 compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD`` 863 points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of 864 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 865 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 866 867 :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` 868 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 869 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 870 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 871 default. 872 873 :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` 874 Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C 875 and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When 876 building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` 877 is set to the value of this variable by default. 878 879 :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` 880 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 881 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 882 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 883 by default. 884 885 :term:`BUILD_FC` 886 Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By 887 default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the 888 value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 889 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 890 891 :term:`BUILD_LD` 892 Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default, 893 ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments 894 the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming 895 ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set. 896 897 :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH` 898 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By 899 default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty. 900 901 :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` 902 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build 903 host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 904 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 905 by default. 906 907 :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION` 908 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 909 building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through 910 the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and 911 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values. 912 913 The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2 914 -pipe". 915 916 :term:`BUILD_OS` 917 Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g. 918 "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of 919 ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the 920 first word, converted to lower-case characters. 921 922 :term:`BUILD_PREFIX` 923 The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded 924 build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the 925 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for 926 ``native`` recipes. 927 928 :term:`BUILD_STRIP` 929 Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from 930 binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP`` 931 points to 932 ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``. 933 934 :term:`BUILD_SYS` 935 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 936 system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building 937 ``native`` recipes). 938 939 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 940 on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`, 941 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and 942 :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the 943 ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself. 944 945 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR` 946 Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host. 947 The default value is an empty string (""). 948 949 :term:`BUILDDIR` 950 Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`. 951 You can define this directory indirectly through the 952 :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build 953 Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do 954 not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to 955 ``build`` in the current directory. 956 957 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` 958 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 959 class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build 960 history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local 961 repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory`` 962 class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each 963 top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages, 964 and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time, 965 you should set this value to "1". 966 967 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build 968 history output in a local Git repository: 969 :: 970 971 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0" 972 973 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR` 974 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 975 class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit. 976 In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the 977 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must 978 be set to "1". 979 980 Git requires that the value you provide for the 981 ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name 982 email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid 983 does not produce an error. 984 985 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 986 :: 987 988 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>" 989 990 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR` 991 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 992 class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history 993 information is kept. For more information on how the variable works, 994 see the ``buildhistory.class``. 995 996 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows: 997 :: 998 999 BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory" 1000 1001 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES` 1002 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1003 class, this variable specifies the build history features to be 1004 enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the 1005 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`" 1006 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1007 1008 You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list: 1009 1010 - *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the 1011 list of installed packages among other things. 1012 1013 - *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages. 1014 1015 - *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit 1016 (SDK). 1017 1018 - *task:* Save output file signatures for 1019 :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>` 1020 (sstate) tasks. 1021 This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for 1022 each file staged (i.e. the output of the task). 1023 1024 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following 1025 features: 1026 :: 1027 1028 BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk" 1029 1030 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES` 1031 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1032 class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from 1033 the image contents into the build history directory under an 1034 "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you 1035 can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy 1036 ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for 1037 changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include 1038 any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error. 1039 Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present. 1040 1041 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the 1042 following files: 1043 :: 1044 1045 BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group" 1046 1047 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO` 1048 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1049 class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to 1050 which build history pushes Git changes. In order for 1051 ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work, 1052 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to 1053 "1". 1054 1055 The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a 1056 repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name 1057 that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local 1058 repository. 1059 1060 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 1061 :: 1062 1063 BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= "" 1064 1065 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` 1066 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 1067 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1068 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 1069 default. 1070 1071 :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` 1072 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1073 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in 1074 the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set 1075 to the value of this variable by default. 1076 1077 :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` 1078 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 1079 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1080 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1081 by default. 1082 1083 :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` 1084 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK. 1085 When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1086 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1087 by default. 1088 1089 :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE` 1090 Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics 1091 when you use and enable the 1092 :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The 1093 ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to 1094 ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``. 1095 1096 :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID` 1097 For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output 1098 executable file into two parts: one for features that require 1099 ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that 1100 do not require ``setuid root``). 1101 1102 The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in 1103 splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get 1104 a single output executable file. 1105 1106 :term:`CACHE` 1107 Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the 1108 :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time 1109 BitBake is started. 1110 1111 :term:`CC` 1112 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler. 1113 1114 :term:`CFLAGS` 1115 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is 1116 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1117 software being built during the compilation step. 1118 1119 Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1120 being built: 1121 1122 - :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the 1123 target 1124 1125 - :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the 1126 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1127 1128 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for 1129 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1130 1131 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE` 1132 An internal variable specifying the special class override that 1133 should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so 1134 forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g. 1135 :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`, 1136 :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the 1137 variable to appropriate values. 1138 1139 .. note:: 1140 1141 ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the 1142 ``bitbake.conf`` file. 1143 1144 As an example, the following override allows you to install extra 1145 files, but only when building for the target: 1146 :: 1147 1148 do_install_append_class-target() { 1149 install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir} 1150 } 1151 1152 Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to 1153 "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not 1154 building for the build host: 1155 :: 1156 1157 FOO_class-native = "native" 1158 FOO = "other" 1159 1160 The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply 1161 that it is included in the default value of 1162 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1163 1164 :term:`CLEANBROKEN` 1165 If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the 1166 ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built. 1167 Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run 1168 ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` 1169 task, which is the default behavior. 1170 1171 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES` 1172 Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both 1173 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and 1174 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of 1175 features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at 1176 the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the 1177 "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be 1178 optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports 1179 Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it. 1180 1181 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` 1182 Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the 1183 :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license 1184 files reside. 1185 1186 :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` 1187 A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the 1188 recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is 1189 non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression 1190 is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the 1191 variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with 1192 which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is 1193 particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase 1194 parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not 1195 compatible with the current system. 1196 1197 :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 1198 A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines 1199 with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched 1200 against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use 1201 the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which 1202 the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly 1203 useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing 1204 speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible 1205 with the current machine. 1206 1207 :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB` 1208 Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary 1209 packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in 1210 an image. 1211 1212 .. note:: 1213 1214 The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching 1215 (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__), 1216 which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion 1217 (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__). 1218 1219 The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an 1220 item that can be added to 1221 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of 1222 this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` 1223 will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development 1224 files) for every package in the image. 1225 1226 To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag 1227 to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the 1228 wildcard. Here is an example: 1229 :: 1230 1231 COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev' 1232 1233 :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR` 1234 Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 1235 system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific 1236 sysroots for other recipes. 1237 1238 The default is 1239 "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``." 1240 (i.e. 1241 "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``"). 1242 1243 :term:`CONF_VERSION` 1244 Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e. 1245 ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time 1246 ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes. 1247 1248 :term:`CONFFILES` 1249 Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package. 1250 If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update 1251 packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration 1252 files you have changed after the original installation and that you 1253 now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words, 1254 editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset 1255 as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES`` 1256 variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent 1257 the PMS from overwriting during this update process. 1258 1259 To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override 1260 that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a 1261 space-separated list of files. Here is an example: 1262 :: 1263 1264 CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \ 1265 ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3" 1266 1267 A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES`` 1268 variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of 1269 the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files 1270 you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that 1271 the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must 1272 already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES`` 1273 variable. 1274 1275 .. note:: 1276 1277 When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is 1278 good practice to use appropriate path variables. 1279 For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}`` 1280 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at 1281 the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the 1282 :term:`Source Directory`. 1283 1284 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` 1285 Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The 1286 OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig 1287 variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set 1288 to null (""). 1289 1290 The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive 1291 with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and 1292 files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain 1293 a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories 1294 should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs 1295 image. Files should contain entries according to the format described 1296 by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree. 1297 1298 If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image 1299 will be the aggregate of all of them. 1300 1301 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 1302 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 1303 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1304 1305 :term:`CONFIG_SITE` 1306 A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to 1307 the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities 1308 when running ``configure``. 1309 1310 :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS` 1311 The minimal arguments for GNU configure. 1312 1313 :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES` 1314 When inheriting the 1315 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 1316 class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be 1317 in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the 1318 ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also 1319 appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 1320 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 1321 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 1322 1323 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1324 A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source 1325 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In 1326 other words, if a license in a recipe's 1327 :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of 1328 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the 1329 class. 1330 1331 .. note:: 1332 1333 The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the 1334 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable. 1335 1336 The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for 1337 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1338 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1339 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1340 1341 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` 1342 A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived 1343 by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other 1344 words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE` 1345 value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its 1346 source is archived by the class. 1347 1348 The default value is set by the 1349 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1350 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes 1351 "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*". 1352 1353 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE` 1354 A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the 1355 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1356 ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1357 exclusion caused through the 1358 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1359 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1360 variables, respectively. 1361 1362 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude 1363 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1364 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1365 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1366 1367 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE` 1368 A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the 1369 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1370 ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1371 exclusion caused through the 1372 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1373 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1374 variables, respectively. 1375 1376 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include 1377 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the 1378 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1379 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1380 1381 :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES` 1382 A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source 1383 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. 1384 Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``, 1385 ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``. 1386 1387 The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`` 1388 is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` 1389 class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1390 1391 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` 1392 If set to "1" along with the 1393 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the 1394 OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files, 1395 which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each 1396 package. The license files are placed in directories within the image 1397 itself during build time. 1398 1399 .. note:: 1400 1401 The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1402 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1403 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1404 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1405 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1406 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1407 information on providing license text. 1408 1409 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` 1410 If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license 1411 manifest for the image to 1412 ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image 1413 itself during build time. 1414 1415 .. note:: 1416 1417 The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1418 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1419 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1420 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1421 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1422 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1423 information on providing license text. 1424 1425 :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL` 1426 Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should 1427 only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found 1428 in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1429 1430 This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer 1431 supported. 1432 1433 :term:`COREBASE` 1434 Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata 1435 layer (i.e. ``meta``). 1436 1437 It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent 1438 of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you 1439 have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name 1440 for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE`` 1441 points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of 1442 the ``poky/meta`` layer. 1443 1444 :term:`COREBASE_FILES` 1445 Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that 1446 should be copied other than the layers listed in the 1447 ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for 1448 the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system 1449 into the extensible SDK. 1450 1451 Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it 1452 typically contains build directories and other files that should not 1453 normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value 1454 of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that 1455 are actually needed. 1456 1457 :term:`CPP` 1458 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor. 1459 1460 :term:`CPPFLAGS` 1461 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1462 C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment 1463 variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the 1464 compilation step. 1465 1466 Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1467 being built: 1468 1469 - :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for 1470 the target 1471 1472 - :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the 1473 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1474 1475 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building 1476 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1477 1478 :term:`CROSS_COMPILE` 1479 The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The 1480 ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the 1481 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable. 1482 1483 .. note:: 1484 1485 The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE`` 1486 variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel 1487 and kernel module recipes). 1488 1489 :term:`CVSDIR` 1490 The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are 1491 stored. 1492 1493 :term:`CXX` 1494 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler. 1495 1496 :term:`CXXFLAGS` 1497 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is 1498 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1499 software being built during the compilation step. 1500 1501 Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1502 being built: 1503 1504 - :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for 1505 the target 1506 1507 - :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the 1508 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1509 1510 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building 1511 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1512 1513 :term:`D` 1514 The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory` 1515 where components are installed by the 1516 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults 1517 to: 1518 :: 1519 1520 ${WORKDIR}/image 1521 1522 .. note:: 1523 1524 Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under 1525 :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`. 1526 1527 :term:`DATE` 1528 The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month, 1529 and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015). 1530 1531 :term:`DATETIME` 1532 The date and time on which the current build started. The format is 1533 suitable for timestamps. 1534 1535 :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME` 1536 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1537 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a 1538 particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library 1539 package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you 1540 set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe: 1541 :: 1542 1543 DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1" 1544 1545 :term:`DEBIANNAME` 1546 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1547 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override 1548 the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library 1549 name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an 1550 override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the 1551 ``dbus`` recipe: 1552 :: 1553 1554 DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1" 1555 1556 :term:`DEBUG_BUILD` 1557 Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This 1558 influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable. 1559 1560 :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION` 1561 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 1562 compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O 1563 -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe". 1564 1565 :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE` 1566 Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority. 1567 1568 The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within 1569 a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the 1570 variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build 1571 by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to 1572 build the development version. 1573 1574 .. note:: 1575 1576 The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden 1577 by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two 1578 layers that contain different versions of the same recipe. 1579 1580 :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` 1581 The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e. 1582 the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The 1583 ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define 1584 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 1585 1586 The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the 1587 machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override 1588 the setting using available tunes as defined with 1589 :term:`AVAILTUNES`. 1590 1591 :term:`DEPENDS` 1592 Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on 1593 other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are 1594 needed by the recipe at build time. 1595 1596 As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following 1597 assignment: 1598 :: 1599 1600 DEPENDS = "bar" 1601 1602 The practical effect of the previous 1603 assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in 1604 the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the 1605 :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the 1606 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs. 1607 This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on 1608 the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of 1609 each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a 1610 ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]`` 1611 declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class. 1612 1613 .. note:: 1614 1615 It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` 1616 explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are 1617 configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots. 1618 1619 As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities 1620 that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe 1621 that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen`` 1622 might have the following: 1623 :: 1624 1625 DEPENDS = "codegen-native" 1626 1627 For more 1628 information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and 1629 the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable. 1630 1631 .. note:: 1632 1633 - ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise, 1634 it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which 1635 usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as 1636 "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo" 1637 instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make 1638 up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the 1639 sysroot. 1640 1641 - One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by 1642 itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages 1643 produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the 1644 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 1645 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, 1646 runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning 1647 ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes. 1648 1649 - Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for 1650 recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if 1651 ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against 1652 ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both 1653 ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot. 1654 Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo`` 1655 to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might 1656 fail to link against ``libfoo``. 1657 1658 For information on runtime dependencies, see the 1659 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 1660 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 1661 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 1662 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 1663 dependencies. 1664 1665 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR` 1666 Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to 1667 place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready 1668 to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory 1669 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1670 ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``. 1671 1672 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1673 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1674 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1675 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`", 1676 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and 1677 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the 1678 Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1679 1680 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB` 1681 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1682 Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build 1683 system. This variable applies only when 1684 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1685 "package_deb". 1686 1687 The BitBake configuration file initially defines the 1688 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of 1689 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1690 :: 1691 1692 DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb" 1693 1694 The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the 1695 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the 1696 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task 1697 writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more 1698 information on how packaging works, see the 1699 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1700 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1701 1702 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1703 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1704 images and other associated output files that are ready to be 1705 deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific 1706 as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory 1707 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1708 ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``. 1709 1710 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1711 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1712 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1713 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and 1714 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in 1715 the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1716 1717 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK` 1718 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1719 IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1720 This variable applies only when 1721 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1722 "package_ipk". 1723 1724 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1725 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1726 :: 1727 1728 DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk" 1729 1730 The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the 1731 ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the 1732 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task 1733 writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1734 on how packaging works, see the 1735 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1736 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1737 1738 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM` 1739 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1740 RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1741 This variable applies only when 1742 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1743 "package_rpm". 1744 1745 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1746 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1747 :: 1748 1749 DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm" 1750 1751 The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the 1752 ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the 1753 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task 1754 writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1755 on how packaging works, see the 1756 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1757 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1758 1759 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR` 1760 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1761 tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This 1762 variable applies only when 1763 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1764 "package_tar". 1765 1766 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1767 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1768 :: 1769 1770 DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar" 1771 1772 The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the 1773 ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the 1774 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task 1775 writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1776 on how packaging works, see the 1777 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1778 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1779 1780 :term:`DEPLOYDIR` 1781 When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the 1782 ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that 1783 is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows: 1784 :: 1785 1786 DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}" 1787 1788 Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be 1789 deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying 1790 them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1791 afterwards. 1792 1793 :term:`DESCRIPTION` 1794 The package description used by package managers. If not set, 1795 ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY` 1796 variable. 1797 1798 :term:`DISTRO` 1799 The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name 1800 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1801 variable. 1802 1803 The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration 1804 file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose 1805 filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution 1806 configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf`` 1807 and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the 1808 :term:`Source Directory`. 1809 1810 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as 1811 follows: 1812 :: 1813 1814 DISTRO = "poky" 1815 1816 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1817 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1818 distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain 1819 spaces, and is typically all lower-case. 1820 1821 .. note:: 1822 1823 If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations 1824 are used, which are specified within 1825 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1826 1827 :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME` 1828 Specifies a codename for the distribution being built. 1829 1830 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 1831 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images. 1832 This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the 1833 variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that 1834 include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep 1835 distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro 1836 variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file. 1837 1838 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 1839 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if 1840 the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g. 1841 kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but 1842 you can remove them. 1843 1844 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` 1845 The software support you want in your distribution for various 1846 features. You define your distribution features in the distribution 1847 configuration file. 1848 1849 In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in 1850 ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied 1851 to the configure script during the 1852 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that 1853 optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in 1854 ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the 1855 target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support 1856 enabled. 1857 1858 Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete 1859 list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can 1860 provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section. 1861 1862 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 1863 Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in 1864 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 1865 1866 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 1867 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 1868 the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for 1869 all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section 1870 for more information. 1871 1872 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 1873 Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 1874 backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See 1875 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 1876 1877 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT` 1878 A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro 1879 features with the exception of any features specific to the C library 1880 (``libc``). 1881 1882 When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be 1883 able to reuse the default 1884 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the 1885 need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses 1886 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file: 1887 :: 1888 1889 DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature" 1890 1891 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1892 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1893 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1894 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This 1895 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1896 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1897 variable. 1898 1899 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1900 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1901 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1902 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This 1903 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1904 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1905 variable. 1906 1907 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1908 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1909 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native 1910 recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered 1911 using the 1912 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1913 variable. 1914 1915 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1916 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1917 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building 1918 nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features 1919 filtered using the 1920 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1921 variable. 1922 1923 :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1924 The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name 1925 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable. 1926 1927 The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution 1928 configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's 1929 argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the 1930 distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named 1931 ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory 1932 of the :term:`Source Directory`. 1933 1934 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set 1935 as follows: 1936 :: 1937 1938 DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)" 1939 1940 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1941 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1942 distribution configuration. 1943 1944 .. note:: 1945 1946 If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default 1947 configurations are used, which are specified within 1948 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1949 1950 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` 1951 The version of the distribution. 1952 1953 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` 1954 A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current 1955 distribution. By default, this list includes the value of 1956 :term:`DISTRO`. 1957 1958 You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should 1959 apply to the distribution. 1960 1961 The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it 1962 is included in the default value of 1963 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1964 1965 :term:`DL_DIR` 1966 The central download directory used by the build process to store 1967 downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring 1968 for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git 1969 repositories, use the 1970 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 1971 variable. 1972 1973 You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the 1974 ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you 1975 should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is 1976 ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1977 :: 1978 1979 #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads" 1980 1981 To specify a different download directory, 1982 simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory. 1983 1984 During a first build, the system downloads many different source code 1985 tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a 1986 while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are 1987 all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build 1988 system looks there first to find source tarballs. 1989 1990 .. note:: 1991 1992 When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to 1993 speed up this part of subsequent builds. 1994 1995 You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the 1996 same development machine. For additional information on how the build 1997 process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy 1998 server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`" 1999 chapter. You can also refer to the 2000 ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`" 2001 Wiki page. 2002 2003 :term:`DOC_COMPRESS` 2004 When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>` 2005 class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the 2006 OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By 2007 default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies 2008 available are xz and bz2. 2009 2010 For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the 2011 comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file. 2012 2013 :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` 2014 When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or 2015 ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the 2016 ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The 2017 default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead. 2018 2019 See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and 2020 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more 2021 information. 2022 2023 :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION` 2024 Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated 2025 during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or 2026 less). 2027 2028 :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR` 2029 When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>` 2030 class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by 2031 the :ref:`error reporting 2032 tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which 2033 allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central 2034 database. By default, the value of this variable is 2035 ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``. 2036 2037 You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error 2038 reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your 2039 ``local.conf`` file: 2040 :: 2041 2042 ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path" 2043 2044 :term:`ERROR_QA` 2045 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 2046 errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 2047 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 2048 can control with this variable, see the 2049 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 2050 2051 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS` 2052 Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to 2053 exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries. 2054 2055 .. note:: 2056 2057 The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from 2058 the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the 2059 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared 2060 libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between 2061 packages. 2062 2063 The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the 2064 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a 2065 package's particular libraries only and not the whole package. 2066 2067 Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a 2068 particular package: 2069 :: 2070 2071 EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1" 2072 2073 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD` 2074 Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e. 2075 ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and 2076 builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the 2077 ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file. 2078 2079 To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the 2080 variable to "1" in the recipe. 2081 2082 .. note:: 2083 2084 Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a 2085 world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding 2086 a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not 2087 explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build. 2088 2089 :term:`EXTENDPE` 2090 Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's 2091 version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE`` 2092 is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that 2093 value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1"). 2094 If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero, 2095 ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "". 2096 2097 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. 2098 2099 :term:`EXTENDPKGV` 2100 The full package version specification as it appears on the final 2101 packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used 2102 to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another 2103 package in the same recipe: 2104 :: 2105 2106 RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})" 2107 2108 The dependency relationships are intended to force the package 2109 manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step. 2110 2111 :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS` 2112 When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these 2113 tools are not in the source tree. 2114 2115 When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over 2116 any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` 2117 variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed 2118 external tools. See the 2119 :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in 2120 ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used. 2121 2122 :term:`EXTERNALSRC` 2123 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2124 class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of 2125 the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the 2126 :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build 2127 system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code. 2128 2129 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2130 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2131 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2132 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2133 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2134 2135 :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD` 2136 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2137 class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's 2138 source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build 2139 system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable, 2140 which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build 2141 Directory. 2142 2143 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2144 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2145 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2146 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2147 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2148 2149 :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF` 2150 For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` 2151 class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to 2152 pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the 2153 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. 2154 2155 The default value is "--exclude=autopoint". 2156 2157 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` 2158 A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing 2159 more than one feature, separate them with a space. 2160 2161 Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file, 2162 which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`. 2163 Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best 2164 practices dictate that you do not. 2165 2166 .. note:: 2167 2168 To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the 2169 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 2170 2171 Here are some examples of features you can add: 2172 2173 - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including 2174 symbol information for debugging and profiling. 2175 2176 - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and 2177 enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and 2178 'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" 2179 section for more information. 2180 - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is 2181 useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image. 2182 - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is 2183 read-only. See the 2184 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`" 2185 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 2186 information 2187 - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace. 2188 - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make, 2189 pkgconfig and so forth. 2190 - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools 2191 such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth. 2192 2193 For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto 2194 Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 2195 2196 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 2197 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 2198 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2199 2200 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD` 2201 Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has 2202 been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting 2203 this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is 2204 an example: 2205 :: 2206 2207 EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096" 2208 2209 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS` 2210 A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for 2211 installing into the root filesystem. 2212 2213 Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not 2214 needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`` 2215 variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A 2216 typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration. 2217 2218 .. note:: 2219 2220 To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various 2221 \*:term:`RDEPENDS` and \*:term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables. 2222 2223 :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` 2224 A list of subdirectories of 2225 ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}`` 2226 added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an 2227 example, the following prepends 2228 "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to 2229 ``PATH``: 2230 :: 2231 2232 EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar" 2233 2234 :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` 2235 Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the 2236 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information. 2237 2238 :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` 2239 Additional ``configure`` script options. See 2240 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for 2241 additional information on passing configure script options. 2242 2243 :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` 2244 Additional GNU ``make`` options. 2245 2246 Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the 2247 variable to specify any required GNU options. 2248 2249 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and 2250 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of 2251 ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags. 2252 2253 :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS` 2254 When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this 2255 variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass 2256 to the ``scons`` command line. 2257 2258 :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS` 2259 When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>` 2260 class, this variable provides image level user and group operations. 2261 This is a more global method of providing user and group 2262 configuration as compared to using the 2263 :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and 2264 group configurations to a specific recipe. 2265 2266 The set list of commands you can configure using the 2267 ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These 2268 commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names: 2269 :: 2270 2271 # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\ 2272 # useradd -p '' tester; \ 2273 # groupadd developers; \ 2274 # userdel nobody; \ 2275 # groupdel -g video; \ 2276 # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \ 2277 # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \ 2278 # " 2279 2280 :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES` 2281 Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific 2282 item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 2283 When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of 2284 the feature item as an override. Here is an example: 2285 :: 2286 2287 FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2" 2288 2289 In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``, 2290 package1 and package2 would be included in the image. 2291 2292 .. note:: 2293 2294 Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` 2295 are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not 2296 confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which 2297 are discussed elsewhere in the documentation. 2298 2299 :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI` 2300 Points to the base URL of the server and location within the 2301 document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by 2302 OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set 2303 this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2304 2305 Consider the following example: 2306 :: 2307 2308 FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir" 2309 2310 This example assumes you are serving 2311 your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory 2312 named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's 2313 document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates 2314 a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with 2315 the feed. 2316 2317 :term:`FILES` 2318 The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The 2319 :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages 2320 generated by a recipe. 2321 2322 To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that 2323 identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated 2324 list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as 2325 part of the resulting package. Here is an example: 2326 :: 2327 2328 FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile" 2329 2330 .. note:: 2331 2332 - When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using 2333 Python's 2334 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ 2335 syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by 2336 following the previous link. 2337 2338 - When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is 2339 good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example, 2340 use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}`` 2341 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these 2342 variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in 2343 the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also 2344 find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in 2345 this file. 2346 2347 If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are 2348 editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the 2349 package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you 2350 can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See 2351 the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on 2352 how to identify these files to the PMS. 2353 2354 :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` 2355 Defines the file specification to match 2356 :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words, 2357 ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development 2358 symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform. 2359 2360 The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is 2361 set: 2362 :: 2363 2364 FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}" 2365 2366 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` 2367 Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 2368 looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append 2369 files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes 2370 are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH` 2371 variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using 2372 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``. 2373 2374 Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using 2375 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you 2376 prepend paths as follows: 2377 :: 2378 2379 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2380 2381 In the above example, the build system first 2382 looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the 2383 corresponding append file. 2384 2385 .. note:: 2386 2387 When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate 2388 expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that 2389 BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the 2390 directive is encountered rather than at some later time when 2391 expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the 2392 files you need. 2393 2394 Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are 2395 prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you 2396 are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories 2397 to the search path. 2398 2399 Here is another common use: 2400 :: 2401 2402 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:" 2403 2404 In this example, the build system extends the 2405 ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is 2406 in the same directory as the corresponding append file. 2407 2408 This next example specifically adds three paths: 2409 :: 2410 2411 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:" 2412 2413 A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include 2414 a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful 2415 in a BSP layer: 2416 :: 2417 2418 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2419 2420 The previous statement appears in the 2421 ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the 2422 :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in 2423 ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine 2424 override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 2425 definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines. 2426 2427 .. note:: 2428 2429 For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be 2430 the value of ``MACHINE``. 2431 2432 By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append 2433 files that reside in different layers but are used for the same 2434 recipe to correctly extend the path. 2435 2436 :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` 2437 A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the 2438 OpenEmbedded build system for creating 2439 :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable 2440 uses overrides to automatically extend the 2441 :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how 2442 that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable 2443 description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides 2444 are handled in the 2445 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 2446 section of the BitBake User Manual. 2447 2448 By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as: 2449 :: 2450 2451 FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}" 2452 2453 .. note:: 2454 2455 Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up 2456 with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the 2457 build system. 2458 2459 :term:`FILESPATH` 2460 The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses 2461 when searching for patches and files. 2462 2463 During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in 2464 ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and 2465 patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's 2466 :term:`SRC_URI` statements. 2467 2468 The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the 2469 ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the 2470 :term:`Source Directory`: 2471 :: 2472 2473 FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \ 2474 "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}" 2475 2476 The 2477 ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides 2478 from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable. 2479 2480 .. note:: 2481 2482 - Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the 2483 build system to look in directories other than the defaults, 2484 extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2485 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable. 2486 2487 - Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map 2488 to directories in custom layers where append files 2489 (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find 2490 patches or files that reside with your append files, you need 2491 to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2492 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable. 2493 2494 You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For 2495 example, consider a case where the following directory structure 2496 exists for general and machine-specific configurations: 2497 :: 2498 2499 files/defconfig 2500 files/MACHINEA/defconfig 2501 files/MACHINEB/defconfig 2502 2503 Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains 2504 "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set 2505 :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build 2506 system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to 2507 "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``. 2508 Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the 2509 build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``. 2510 2511 You can find out more about the patching process in the 2512 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section 2513 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 2514 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in 2515 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the 2516 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well. 2517 2518 :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES` 2519 Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part 2520 of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose 2521 you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups 2522 and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the 2523 packages themselves but this is not always possible. 2524 2525 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``, 2526 which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`. 2527 If you create your own file 2528 permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the 2529 distro's layer. 2530 2531 You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the 2532 ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`, 2533 to point to your custom 2534 ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions 2535 setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined 2536 within the :term:`BBPATH` variable. 2537 2538 For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings 2539 table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``. 2540 2541 :term:`FIT_DESC` 2542 Specifies the description string encoded into a fitImage. The default 2543 value is set by the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` 2544 class as follows:: 2545 2546 FIT_DESC ?= "U-Boot fitImage for ${DISTRO_NAME}/${PV}/${MACHINE}" 2547 2548 :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS` 2549 Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they 2550 don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``. 2551 The default value is 0. 2552 2553 :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG` 2554 Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256. 2555 2556 :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS` 2557 Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing 2558 fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to 2559 use. 2560 2561 :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS` 2562 Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage. 2563 The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode 2564 and new for generating new keys. 2565 2566 :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS` 2567 Format for public key ceritifcate used in signing fitImage. 2568 The default value is "x509". 2569 2570 :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG` 2571 Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. 2572 For e.g. rsa2048. 2573 2574 :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS` 2575 Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default 2576 value is "2048". 2577 2578 :term:`FIT_SIGN_INDIVIDUAL` 2579 If set to "1", then the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` 2580 class will sign the kernel, dtb and ramdisk images individually in addition 2581 to signing the fitImage itself. This could be useful if you are 2582 intending to verify signatures in another context than booting via 2583 U-Boot. 2584 2585 :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 2586 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2587 this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages. 2588 By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils". 2589 2590 :term:`FONT_PACKAGES` 2591 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2592 this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to 2593 be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes 2594 that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 2595 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you 2596 need are in a package other than that main package. 2597 2598 :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE` 2599 Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED`` 2600 during the generation of the root filesystem. 2601 2602 Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages. 2603 2604 :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` 2605 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 2606 compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe 2607 ${DEBUG_FLAGS}". 2608 2609 :term:`GCCPIE` 2610 Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C 2611 Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented 2612 Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute. 2613 2614 By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the 2615 variable as follows: 2616 :: 2617 2618 GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie" 2619 2620 :term:`GCCVERSION` 2621 Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for 2622 compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the 2623 ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file: 2624 :: 2625 2626 GCCVERSION ?= "8.%" 2627 2628 You can override this value by setting it in a 2629 configuration file such as the ``local.conf``. 2630 2631 :term:`GDB` 2632 The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger. 2633 2634 :term:`GITDIR` 2635 The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored 2636 when it is cloned. 2637 2638 :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 2639 Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish 2640 to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming. 2641 2642 .. note:: 2643 2644 If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set 2645 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately. 2646 2647 You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file. 2648 By default, all locales are generated. 2649 :: 2650 2651 GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8" 2652 2653 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM` 2654 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2655 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2656 passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the 2657 system when the package is installed. 2658 2659 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 2660 :: 2661 2662 GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev" 2663 2664 For information on the standard Linux shell command 2665 ``groupadd``, see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd. 2666 2667 :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` 2668 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2669 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2670 passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members 2671 of a group when the package is installed. 2672 2673 For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``, 2674 see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems. 2675 2676 :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL` 2677 Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics 2678 and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your 2679 ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics 2680 and serial in the menu. 2681 2682 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 2683 information on how this variable is used. 2684 2685 :term:`GRUB_OPTS` 2686 Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) 2687 configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate 2688 multiple options. 2689 2690 The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the 2691 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2692 on how this variable is used. 2693 2694 :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT` 2695 Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the 2696 GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB). 2697 2698 The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the 2699 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2700 on how this variable is used. 2701 2702 :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES` 2703 When inheriting the 2704 :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class, 2705 this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input 2706 method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other 2707 than the main package. 2708 2709 :term:`HOMEPAGE` 2710 Website where more information about the software the recipe is 2711 building can be found. 2712 2713 :term:`HOST_ARCH` 2714 The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as 2715 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system 2716 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 2717 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 2718 configurable: 2719 2720 - arm 2721 - i586 2722 - x86_64 2723 - powerpc 2724 - powerpc64 2725 - mips 2726 - mipsel 2727 2728 :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH` 2729 Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the 2730 C compiler. 2731 2732 Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what 2733 is being built: 2734 2735 - :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the 2736 target 2737 2738 - :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e. 2739 ``-native``) 2740 2741 - ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e. 2742 ``nativesdk-``) 2743 2744 :term:`HOST_OS` 2745 Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally 2746 the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can 2747 be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for 2748 ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and 2749 "linux-musleabi" values possible. 2750 2751 :term:`HOST_PREFIX` 2752 Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX`` 2753 is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`. 2754 2755 :term:`HOST_SYS` 2756 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 2757 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 2758 current recipe. 2759 2760 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 2761 on :term:`HOST_ARCH`, 2762 :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and 2763 :term:`HOST_OS` variables. 2764 2765 .. note:: 2766 2767 You do not need to set the variable yourself. 2768 2769 Consider these two examples: 2770 2771 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the 2772 value is "i686-linux". 2773 2774 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running 2775 Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 2776 2777 :term:`HOSTTOOLS` 2778 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2779 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2780 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool 2781 specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build 2782 host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build 2783 is not started. 2784 2785 For additional information, see 2786 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`. 2787 2788 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL` 2789 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2790 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2791 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike 2792 :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system 2793 does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of 2794 ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can 2795 use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools. 2796 2797 :term:`HOST_VENDOR` 2798 Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the 2799 same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`. 2800 2801 :term:`ICECC_DISABLED` 2802 Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more 2803 information on this function and best practices for using this 2804 variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`" 2805 section. 2806 2807 Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the 2808 function: 2809 :: 2810 2811 ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1" 2812 2813 To enable the function, set the variable as follows: 2814 :: 2815 2816 ICECC_DISABLED = "" 2817 2818 :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC` 2819 Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This 2820 variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You 2821 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2822 2823 If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded 2824 build system uses the default script provided by the 2825 ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not 2826 the one that comes with ``icecc``. 2827 2828 :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE` 2829 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 2830 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel 2831 compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x 2832 represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run. 2833 2834 .. note:: 2835 2836 The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the 2837 network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon. 2838 2839 If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the 2840 maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best 2841 performance could take some experimentation since machine speed, 2842 network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all 2843 affect build time. Consequently, unlike the 2844 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no 2845 rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal 2846 performance. 2847 2848 If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not 2849 use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of 2850 cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``). 2851 2852 :term:`ICECC_PATH` 2853 The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in 2854 your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define 2855 this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts 2856 to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``. 2857 2858 :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL` 2859 Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2860 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2861 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2862 your ``local.conf`` file. 2863 2864 When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2865 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes 2866 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2867 2868 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL` 2869 Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2870 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2871 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2872 your ``local.conf`` file. 2873 2874 When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2875 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages 2876 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2877 2878 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL` 2879 Identifies user recipes that use an empty 2880 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to 2881 force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream 2882 distributed compile support. This variable is used by the 2883 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2884 your ``local.conf`` file. 2885 2886 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` 2887 The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the 2888 recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). 2889 2890 :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES` 2891 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2892 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2893 ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default, 2894 the files are 2895 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2896 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2897 (;). Source files need to be located in 2898 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2899 examples: 2900 :: 2901 2902 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2" 2903 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio" 2904 2905 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2906 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2907 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2908 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2909 Here are two examples: 2910 :: 2911 2912 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*" 2913 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/" 2914 2915 The first example 2916 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/`` 2917 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2918 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2919 2920 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2921 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2922 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2923 material for Wic is located in the 2924 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2925 2926 :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES` 2927 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2928 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2929 ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default, 2930 the files are 2931 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2932 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2933 (;). Source files need to be located in 2934 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2935 examples: 2936 :: 2937 2938 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel" 2939 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}" 2940 2941 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2942 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2943 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2944 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2945 Here are two examples: 2946 :: 2947 2948 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*" 2949 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/" 2950 2951 The first example 2952 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles`` 2953 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2954 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2955 2956 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2957 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2958 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2959 material for Wic is located in the 2960 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2961 2962 :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES` 2963 A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use 2964 this variable to specify the list of classes that register the 2965 different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates. 2966 2967 The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can 2968 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution 2969 configuration file. 2970 2971 For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the 2972 :term:`Source Directory`. 2973 2974 :term:`IMAGE_CMD` 2975 Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image 2976 type, which corresponds to the value set set in 2977 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``, 2978 ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use 2979 an override for the associated type. Here is an example: 2980 :: 2981 2982 IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \ 2983 --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \ 2984 ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}" 2985 2986 You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding 2987 support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this 2988 variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>` 2989 class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``. 2990 2991 :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES` 2992 Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that 2993 are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image. 2994 These files list basic device nodes that should be created under 2995 ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set, 2996 ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by 2997 :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write 2998 device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an 2999 example. 3000 3001 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` 3002 The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you 3003 configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this 3004 variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the 3005 :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do 3006 not. 3007 3008 .. note:: 3009 3010 To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the 3011 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 3012 3013 For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see 3014 the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 3015 3016 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 3017 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 3018 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3019 3020 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` 3021 Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the 3022 build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting 3023 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root 3024 filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``: 3025 :: 3026 3027 IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2" 3028 3029 For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can 3030 choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`. 3031 3032 .. note:: 3033 3034 - If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are 3035 setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set 3036 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line. 3037 3038 - Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this 3039 variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append`` 3040 or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or 3041 more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable. 3042 3043 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` 3044 Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image 3045 through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the 3046 ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues. 3047 3048 Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to 3049 install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally, 3050 "helper" classes such as the 3051 :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can 3052 take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into 3053 auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its 3054 default contents. 3055 3056 When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows: 3057 :: 3058 3059 IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name" 3060 3061 Be sure to include the space 3062 between the quotation character and the start of the package name or 3063 names. 3064 3065 .. note:: 3066 3067 - When working with a 3068 :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 3069 image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify 3070 packages for installation. Instead, use the 3071 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which 3072 allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a 3073 fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``. 3074 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 3075 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" 3076 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3077 3078 - Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the 3079 :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>` 3080 BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from 3081 within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator 3082 in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since 3083 ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default 3084 value using the 3085 :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>` 3086 operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` 3087 results in unexpected behavior when used within 3088 ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from 3089 within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the 3090 specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is 3091 contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work. 3092 3093 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` 3094 Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the 3095 root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system 3096 automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization, 3097 into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable 3098 ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already 3099 selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is 3100 an example: 3101 :: 3102 3103 IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de" 3104 3105 In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese 3106 and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are 3107 installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as 3108 ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages 3109 only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific 3110 language). 3111 3112 See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 3113 variable for information on generating GLIBC locales. 3114 3115 3116 :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3117 The name of the output image symlink (which does not include 3118 the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value 3119 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE` 3120 variables: 3121 :: 3122 3123 IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}" 3124 3125 3126 :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST` 3127 The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed 3128 packages that make up the image. The file contains package 3129 information on a line-per-package basis as follows: 3130 :: 3131 3132 packagename packagearch version 3133 3134 The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest 3135 file as follows: 3136 :: 3137 3138 IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest" 3139 3140 The location is 3141 derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 3142 and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find 3143 information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`" 3144 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 3145 3146 :term:`IMAGE_NAME` 3147 The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable 3148 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, 3149 :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3150 variables: 3151 :: 3152 3153 IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3154 3155 :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX` 3156 Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"`` 3157 to distinguish the image file from other files created during image 3158 building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can 3159 clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example, 3160 this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes. 3161 3162 :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3163 Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial 3164 image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk 3165 usage value for the image is greater than the sum of 3166 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of 3167 the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk 3168 space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a 3169 multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in 3170 30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to 3171 determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that 3172 post install scripts and the package management system uses disk 3173 space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does 3174 not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See 3175 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system 3176 determines the overall image size. 3177 3178 The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room 3179 to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a 3180 small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you 3181 can increase the default value. For example, the following setting 3182 gives you 50% free space added to the image: 3183 :: 3184 3185 IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5" 3186 3187 Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is 3188 added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`` 3189 variable. 3190 3191 :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE` 3192 Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the 3193 OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by 3194 the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`, 3195 :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`, 3196 :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or 3197 :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class. 3198 3199 .. note:: 3200 3201 The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is 3202 recommended that you do not use it. 3203 3204 The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and 3205 :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` 3206 for packaging up images and SDKs. 3207 3208 You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the 3209 variable is set indirectly through the appropriate 3210 :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the 3211 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The 3212 OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM, 3213 or IPK) that appears with the variable 3214 3215 .. note:: 3216 3217 Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute 3218 packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image 3219 or SDK. 3220 3221 :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 3222 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 3223 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3224 functions separated by semicolons: 3225 :: 3226 3227 IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3228 3229 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3230 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3231 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3232 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3233 information. 3234 3235 :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 3236 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 3237 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3238 functions separated by semicolons: 3239 :: 3240 3241 IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3242 3243 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3244 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3245 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3246 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3247 information. 3248 3249 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` 3250 The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction 3251 (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This 3252 variable is not configurable. Do not change it. 3253 3254 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT` 3255 Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the 3256 size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is 3257 rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is 3258 "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for 3259 additional information. 3260 3261 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3262 Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By 3263 default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added 3264 to the image after the build system determines the image size as 3265 described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``. 3266 3267 This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a 3268 specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an 3269 image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of 3270 free disk space is available, set the variable as follows: 3271 :: 3272 3273 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880" 3274 3275 For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests 3276 40 Gbytes of extra space with the line: 3277 :: 3278 3279 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040" 3280 3281 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` 3282 Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded 3283 build system determines the final size for the generated image using 3284 an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for 3285 the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested 3286 additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically, 3287 the build system determines the final size of the generated image as 3288 follows: 3289 :: 3290 3291 if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size: 3292 internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace 3293 else: 3294 internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace 3295 where: 3296 image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image. 3297 overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR 3298 rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE 3299 internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications. 3300 xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE 3301 3302 See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3303 and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3304 variables for related information. 3305 3306 :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP` 3307 Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an 3308 example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class: 3309 :: 3310 3311 IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3" 3312 3313 In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is 3314 listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable, 3315 the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since 3316 one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted 3317 partition containing the root filesystem. 3318 3319 :term:`IMAGE_TYPES` 3320 Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default: 3321 3322 - btrfs 3323 - container 3324 - cpio 3325 - cpio.gz 3326 - cpio.lz4 3327 - cpio.lzma 3328 - cpio.xz 3329 - cramfs 3330 - ext2 3331 - ext2.bz2 3332 - ext2.gz 3333 - ext2.lzma 3334 - ext3 3335 - ext3.gz 3336 - ext4 3337 - ext4.gz 3338 - f2fs 3339 - hddimg 3340 - iso 3341 - jffs2 3342 - jffs2.sum 3343 - multiubi 3344 - squashfs 3345 - squashfs-lz4 3346 - squashfs-lzo 3347 - squashfs-xz 3348 - tar 3349 - tar.bz2 3350 - tar.gz 3351 - tar.lz4 3352 - tar.xz 3353 - tar.zst 3354 - ubi 3355 - ubifs 3356 - wic 3357 - wic.bz2 3358 - wic.gz 3359 - wic.lzma 3360 3361 For more information about these types of images, see 3362 ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 3363 3364 :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3365 Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and 3366 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values. 3367 Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a 3368 version string that comes from your external build environment if 3369 desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across 3370 the build artifacts. 3371 3372 :term:`INC_PR` 3373 Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common 3374 ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the 3375 recipe revision as set from within an include file. 3376 3377 Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across 3378 several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its 3379 :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when 3380 the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find 3381 all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the 3382 updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get 3383 complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide 3384 common functionality are upgraded to a new revision. 3385 3386 A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the 3387 ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes 3388 share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to 3389 help define the recipe revision. 3390 3391 The following provides an example that shows how to use the 3392 ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the 3393 variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you 3394 can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You 3395 will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more 3396 granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable: 3397 :: 3398 3399 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2" 3400 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1" 3401 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0" 3402 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3" 3403 3404 The 3405 first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be 3406 used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining 3407 lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the 3408 ``PR`` value is set. 3409 3410 :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE` 3411 Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would 3412 appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded 3413 from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed 3414 incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually 3415 licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted. 3416 3417 .. note:: 3418 3419 This functionality is only regularly tested using the following 3420 setting: 3421 :: 3422 3423 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0" 3424 3425 3426 Although you can use other settings, you might be required to 3427 remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that 3428 are required to produce a functional system image. 3429 3430 .. note:: 3431 3432 It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be 3433 used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define 3434 a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licences 3435 that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as: 3436 :: 3437 3438 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}" 3439 3440 3441 This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of 3442 all licences from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified 3443 in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` , thus only allowing the latter licences to 3444 be used. 3445 3446 :term:`INHERIT` 3447 Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous 3448 functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base 3449 configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 3450 system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes. 3451 3452 For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the 3453 :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`" 3454 section in the Bitbake User Manual. 3455 3456 :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO` 3457 Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is 3458 unlikely that you want to edit this variable. 3459 3460 The default value of the variable is set as follows in the 3461 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file: 3462 :: 3463 3464 INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license" 3465 3466 :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS` 3467 Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard 3468 C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`. 3469 This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any 3470 compilation using the C compiler. 3471 3472 Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from 3473 being added. 3474 3475 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT` 3476 Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug 3477 information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out 3478 debugging information during the 3479 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on 3480 how debug information is split out, see the 3481 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 3482 variable. 3483 3484 To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information 3485 during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as 3486 follows: 3487 :: 3488 3489 INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1" 3490 3491 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP` 3492 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting 3493 packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source 3494 files. 3495 3496 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts 3497 the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``. 3498 Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you 3499 plan to debug in general. 3500 3501 :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP` 3502 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the 3503 resulting sysroot. 3504 3505 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the 3506 resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the 3507 ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit 3508 this stripping. 3509 3510 If you want to use this variable, include the 3511 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a 3512 ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts 3513 accordingly. 3514 3515 .. note:: 3516 3517 Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and 3518 special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building 3519 bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore, 3520 even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist 3521 that are needed for the build that are not strippable. 3522 3523 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES` 3524 Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem 3525 (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the 3526 same as those supported by the 3527 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable. 3528 3529 The default value of this variable, which is set in the 3530 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the 3531 :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's 3532 initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem 3533 `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects 3534 an optionally compressed cpio archive. 3535 3536 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` 3537 Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image 3538 recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3539 image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an 3540 additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root 3541 filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The 3542 initramfs image recipe you provide should set 3543 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to 3544 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`. 3545 3546 An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for 3547 early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate 3548 and mount the "real" root filesystem). 3549 3550 .. note:: 3551 3552 See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` 3553 recipe in the :term:`Source Directory` 3554 for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as 3555 the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` 3556 to "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3557 3558 You can also find more information by referencing the 3559 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in 3560 the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class, 3561 and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use 3562 the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable. 3563 3564 If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no 3565 initramfs image is built. 3566 3567 For more information, you can also see the 3568 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3569 variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the 3570 kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs 3571 image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3572 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3573 3574 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3575 Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by 3576 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an 3577 extra pass 3578 (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during 3579 kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains 3580 both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3581 image. This makes use of the 3582 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel 3583 feature. 3584 3585 .. note:: 3586 3587 Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a 3588 circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs 3589 recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be 3590 the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the 3591 kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe 3592 since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image. 3593 3594 The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory, 3595 which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`. 3596 3597 Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the 3598 OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the 3599 initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within: 3600 :: 3601 3602 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1" 3603 3604 By default, the 3605 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a 3606 null string as follows: 3607 :: 3608 3609 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= "" 3610 3611 .. note:: 3612 3613 You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a 3614 configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file. 3615 3616 See the 3617 :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>` 3618 file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an 3619 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3620 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3621 3622 :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME` 3623 The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3624 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3625 follows: 3626 :: 3627 3628 INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3629 3630 The value of the 3631 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3632 file, has the following value: 3633 :: 3634 3635 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3636 3637 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3638 information. 3639 3640 :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME` 3641 The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3642 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3643 follows: 3644 :: 3645 3646 INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3647 3648 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3649 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3650 :: 3651 3652 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3653 3654 :term:`INITRD` 3655 Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an 3656 initial RAM disk (``initrd``). 3657 3658 The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the 3659 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 3660 3661 :term:`INITRD_IMAGE` 3662 When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when 3663 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"), 3664 ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to 3665 provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is 3666 "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3667 3668 See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more 3669 information. 3670 3671 :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME` 3672 The filename of the initialization script as installed to 3673 ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``. 3674 3675 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3676 The variable is mandatory. 3677 3678 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES` 3679 A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages 3680 are specified, you need to append the package name to the other 3681 ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override. 3682 3683 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3684 The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN` 3685 variable. 3686 3687 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS` 3688 Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example: 3689 :: 3690 3691 INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ." 3692 3693 In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script 3694 in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6. 3695 3696 The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the 3697 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class. 3698 3699 The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the 3700 ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters, 3701 please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at 3702 https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html 3703 3704 :term:`INSANE_SKIP` 3705 Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a 3706 recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so`` 3707 files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the 3708 recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example 3709 is ``${PN}``: 3710 :: 3711 3712 INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so" 3713 3714 See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a 3715 list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable. 3716 3717 :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE` 3718 By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file. 3719 Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the 3720 configuration level to disable this behavior. 3721 3722 :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS` 3723 When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on 3724 the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the 3725 target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once 3726 the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades 3727 using the package manager at runtime. 3728 3729 :term:`KARCH` 3730 Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the 3731 configuration. Architectures supported for this release are: 3732 3733 - powerpc 3734 - i386 3735 - x86_64 3736 - arm 3737 - qemu 3738 - mips 3739 3740 You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. 3741 3742 :term:`KBRANCH` 3743 A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify 3744 the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a 3745 build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch 3746 you want is being used by the build process. 3747 3748 Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the 3749 kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the 3750 ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the 3751 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH`` 3752 is set as follows in that kernel recipe file: 3753 :: 3754 3755 KBRANCH ?= "standard/base" 3756 3757 This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify 3758 the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target 3759 hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's 3760 append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the 3761 BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the 3762 Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA 3763 machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named 3764 ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``. 3765 Here are the related statements from that append file: 3766 :: 3767 3768 KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base" 3769 KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base" 3770 KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter" 3771 KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone" 3772 3773 The ``KBRANCH`` statements 3774 identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported 3775 BSP. 3776 3777 :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG` 3778 When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` 3779 class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use 3780 during a kernel build. 3781 3782 Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a 3783 build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you 3784 would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e. 3785 "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that 3786 is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the 3787 ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the 3788 :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the 3789 ``defconfig`` file. 3790 3791 To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe 3792 using the following form: 3793 :: 3794 3795 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file 3796 3797 Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses 3798 a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig": 3799 :: 3800 3801 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig" 3802 3803 As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file: 3804 :: 3805 3806 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file 3807 3808 For more 3809 information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the 3810 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`" 3811 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 3812 3813 :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` 3814 Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to 3815 the kernel image type specified using the 3816 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable. 3817 3818 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3819 Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the 3820 name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`` 3821 variable. 3822 3823 The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the 3824 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the 3825 following default value: 3826 :: 3827 3828 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3829 3830 See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE` 3831 and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information. 3832 3833 :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES` 3834 A list of classes defining kernel image types that the 3835 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You 3836 typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An 3837 example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and 3838 resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register 3839 custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this 3840 variable. 3841 3842 :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE` 3843 Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e. 3844 the ``.dtb``) file. 3845 3846 .. note:: 3847 3848 Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device 3849 tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred. 3850 3851 In order to use this variable, the 3852 :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must 3853 be inherited. 3854 3855 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME` 3856 The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3857 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3858 follows: 3859 :: 3860 3861 KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3862 3863 The 3864 value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in 3865 the same file, has the following value: 3866 :: 3867 3868 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3869 3870 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3871 information. 3872 3873 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME` 3874 The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3875 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3876 follows: 3877 :: 3878 3879 KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3880 3881 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3882 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3883 :: 3884 3885 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3886 3887 :term:`KERNEL_DTC_FLAGS` 3888 Specifies the ``dtc`` flags that are passed to the Linux kernel build 3889 system when generating the device trees (via ``DTC_FLAGS`` environment 3890 variable). 3891 3892 In order to use this variable, the 3893 :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must 3894 be inherited. 3895 3896 :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS` 3897 Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded 3898 build system passes on when compiling the kernel. 3899 3900 :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES` 3901 Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build 3902 system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs) 3903 :term:`Metadata` is provided through the 3904 :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH` 3905 variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within 3906 the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for 3907 all BSPs or specific BSPs. 3908 3909 The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments 3910 and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as 3911 config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` 3912 variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide 3913 validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features. 3914 3915 For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12`` 3916 kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs 3917 as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two 3918 statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types: 3919 :: 3920 3921 KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc" 3922 KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}" 3923 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc" 3924 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc" 3925 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc" 3926 3927 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME` 3928 The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3929 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3930 file as follows: 3931 :: 3932 3933 KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3934 3935 The value of the 3936 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3937 file, has the following value: 3938 :: 3939 3940 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3941 3942 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3943 information. 3944 3945 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME` 3946 The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3947 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3948 file as follows: 3949 :: 3950 3951 KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3952 3953 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3954 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3955 :: 3956 3957 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3958 3959 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3960 The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the 3961 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 3962 :: 3963 3964 KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3965 3966 The value of 3967 the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3968 file, has the following value: 3969 :: 3970 3971 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3972 3973 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3974 information. 3975 3976 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE` 3977 Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If 3978 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is 3979 checked against the set value during the 3980 :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if 3981 the kernel image file is larger than the setting. 3982 3983 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a 3984 limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored. 3985 3986 By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the 3987 kernel image is not checked. 3988 3989 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME` 3990 The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the 3991 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 3992 :: 3993 3994 KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3995 3996 The value of the 3997 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 3998 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3999 :: 4000 4001 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 4002 4003 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` 4004 The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine 4005 configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used 4006 when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to 4007 build. 4008 4009 If you want to build an alternate kernel image type in addition to that 4010 specified by ``KERNEL_IMAGETYPE``, use the :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` 4011 variable. 4012 4013 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 4014 Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot. 4015 4016 .. note:: 4017 4018 This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload` 4019 variable. 4020 4021 You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it 4022 can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel 4023 module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution 4024 configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe 4025 itself). 4026 4027 Specify it as follows: 4028 :: 4029 4030 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3" 4031 4032 Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build 4033 system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with 4034 the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear 4035 one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use 4036 case: 4037 :: 4038 4039 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name" 4040 4041 For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with 4042 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable. 4043 4044 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` 4045 Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system 4046 expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify 4047 configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to 4048 provide those module configurations, see the 4049 :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable. 4050 4051 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` 4052 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4053 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4054 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4055 how this variable is used, see the 4056 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4057 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4058 4059 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4060 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4061 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to 4062 the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4063 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4064 4065 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` 4066 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4067 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4068 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4069 how this variable is used, see the 4070 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4071 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4072 4073 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4074 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4075 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical 4076 to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4077 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4078 4079 :term:`KERNEL_VERSION` 4080 Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h`` 4081 or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting 4082 this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been 4083 configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in 4084 contexts prior to configuration will not work. 4085 4086 :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND` 4087 Specifies whether the data referenced through 4088 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The 4089 ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data 4090 exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to 4091 use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your 4092 ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not 4093 needed avoids a potential dependency loop. 4094 4095 :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION` 4096 Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use 4097 this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration 4098 fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc`` 4099 to describe SMP being enabled: 4100 :: 4101 4102 define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP" 4103 4104 :term:`KMACHINE` 4105 The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used 4106 by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the 4107 OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the 4108 OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common`` 4109 goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel 4110 understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these, 4111 the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the 4112 OpenEmbedded build system machine name. 4113 4114 These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux 4115 Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the 4116 ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file: 4117 :: 4118 4119 LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0" 4120 COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}" 4121 SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974" 4122 SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711" 4123 KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32" 4124 KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base" 4125 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}" 4126 4127 The ``KMACHINE`` statement says 4128 that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32". 4129 However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as 4130 "core2-32-intel-common". 4131 4132 :term:`KTYPE` 4133 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4134 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4135 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4136 section in the 4137 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4138 kernel types. 4139 4140 You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the 4141 :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The 4142 value you use must match the value used for the 4143 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the 4144 kernel recipe. 4145 4146 :term:`LABELS` 4147 Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration. 4148 4149 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 4150 information on how this variable is used. 4151 4152 :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` 4153 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends. 4154 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency 4155 by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example: 4156 :: 4157 4158 LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4159 4160 In this previous example, 4161 version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against 4162 :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``. 4163 4164 An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version 4165 numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in 4166 the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of 4167 the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``). 4168 4169 :term:`LAYERDIR` 4170 When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable 4171 provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not 4172 available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded 4173 immediately when parsing of the file completes. 4174 4175 :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS` 4176 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this 4177 layer. 4178 4179 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a 4180 recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name. 4181 Here is an example: 4182 :: 4183 4184 LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4185 4186 In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared 4187 against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``. 4188 4189 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4190 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4191 ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``). 4192 4193 :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT` 4194 Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which 4195 a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable 4196 allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the 4197 layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the 4198 system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new 4199 releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained). 4200 4201 To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use 4202 this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file. 4203 For the list, use the Yocto Project 4204 :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g. 4205 &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the 4206 layer, use a space-separated list: 4207 :: 4208 4209 LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;" 4210 4211 .. note:: 4212 4213 Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project 4214 Compatible version 2 standard. 4215 The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable 4216 is not set for any given layer. 4217 4218 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`" 4219 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4220 4221 :term:`LAYERVERSION` 4222 Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You 4223 can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for 4224 another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer. 4225 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4226 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4227 ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``). 4228 4229 :term:`LD` 4230 The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker. 4231 4232 :term:`LDFLAGS` 4233 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported 4234 to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software 4235 being built during the compilation step. 4236 4237 Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 4238 being built: 4239 4240 - :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4241 target 4242 4243 - :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4244 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 4245 4246 - :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for 4247 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 4248 4249 :term:`LEAD_SONAME` 4250 Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``) 4251 that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its 4252 naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries. 4253 4254 This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class. 4255 4256 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` 4257 Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code. 4258 4259 This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code 4260 files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build 4261 failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any 4262 license change. 4263 4264 This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless 4265 :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED"). 4266 4267 For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" 4268 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4269 4270 :term:`LICENSE` 4271 The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules: 4272 4273 - Do not use spaces within individual license names. 4274 4275 - Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice 4276 between licenses. 4277 4278 - Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses 4279 exist that cover different parts of the source. 4280 4281 - You can use spaces between license names. 4282 4283 - For standard licenses, use the names of the files in 4284 ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the 4285 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in 4286 ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``. 4287 4288 Here are some examples: 4289 :: 4290 4291 LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3" 4292 LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1" 4293 LICENSE = "GPLv2+" 4294 4295 The first example is from the 4296 recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either 4297 the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from 4298 Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code. 4299 The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single 4300 license. 4301 4302 You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle 4303 situations where components of the output have different licenses. 4304 For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2 4305 but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free 4306 Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows: 4307 :: 4308 4309 LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2" 4310 LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2" 4311 LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2" 4312 4313 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` 4314 Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded 4315 build system to create an extra package (i.e. 4316 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add 4317 those packages to the 4318 :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``. 4319 4320 The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in 4321 ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base 4322 name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and 4323 copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files 4324 from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in 4325 the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata 4326 and copies of files marked in 4327 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing 4328 license text). 4329 4330 For related information on providing license text, see the 4331 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the 4332 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the 4333 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 4334 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4335 4336 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` 4337 Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through 4338 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in 4339 order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags, 4340 separate them with spaces. 4341 4342 This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is 4343 typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses 4344 in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information, 4345 see the 4346 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4347 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4348 4349 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` 4350 Lists license flags that when specified in 4351 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not 4352 prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise 4353 known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the 4354 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4355 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4356 4357 :term:`LICENSE_PATH` 4358 Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the 4359 OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the 4360 directory that holds common license text used during the build. The 4361 ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other 4362 areas that have additional licenses: 4363 :: 4364 4365 LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses" 4366 4367 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` 4368 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4369 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4370 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4371 section in the 4372 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4373 kernel types. 4374 4375 If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to 4376 "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the 4377 ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by 4378 the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the 4379 kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources 4380 and configuration. 4381 4382 :term:`LINUX_VERSION` 4383 The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image 4384 being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define 4385 this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the 4386 ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in 4387 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows: 4388 :: 4389 4390 LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24" 4391 4392 The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV` 4393 for the recipe: 4394 :: 4395 4396 PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}" 4397 4398 :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION` 4399 A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux 4400 kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this 4401 variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel 4402 recipes all define the variable as follows: 4403 :: 4404 4405 LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}" 4406 4407 Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel 4408 configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through 4409 the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension 4410 assuming it was set as previously shown: 4411 :: 4412 4413 $ uname -r 4414 3.7.0-rc8-custom 4415 4416 :term:`LOG_DIR` 4417 Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes 4418 overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``. 4419 4420 For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the 4421 :term:`T` variable. 4422 4423 :term:`MACHINE` 4424 Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define 4425 ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the 4426 :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to 4427 "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated 4428 using QEMU: 4429 :: 4430 4431 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4432 4433 The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same 4434 name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus, 4435 when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding 4436 ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in 4437 the :term:`Source Directory` in 4438 ``meta/conf/machine``. 4439 4440 The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped 4441 include the following: 4442 :: 4443 4444 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm" 4445 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64" 4446 MACHINE ?= "qemumips" 4447 MACHINE ?= "qemumips64" 4448 MACHINE ?= "qemuppc" 4449 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4450 MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64" 4451 MACHINE ?= "genericx86" 4452 MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64" 4453 MACHINE ?= "beaglebone" 4454 MACHINE ?= "edgerouter" 4455 4456 The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware 4457 boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer. 4458 4459 .. note:: 4460 4461 Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your 4462 configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``. 4463 4464 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` 4465 Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This 4466 variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or 4467 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit 4468 the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable. 4469 4470 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4471 A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of 4472 the image being built. The build process depends on these packages 4473 being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential" 4474 variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot. 4475 The impact of this variable affects images based on 4476 ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4477 image. 4478 4479 This variable is similar to the 4480 ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception 4481 that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's 4482 list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file 4483 in this list is not found. 4484 4485 As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building 4486 requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the 4487 hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's 4488 ``.conf`` configuration file: 4489 :: 4490 4491 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init" 4492 4493 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4494 A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of 4495 the image being built. The build process does not depend on these 4496 packages being present. However, because this is a 4497 "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for 4498 the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based 4499 on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4500 image. 4501 4502 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` 4503 variable with the exception that the image being built does not have 4504 a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other 4505 words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not 4506 found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel 4507 modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the 4508 kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be 4509 produced. 4510 4511 Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific 4512 touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However, 4513 the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on 4514 the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you 4515 want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the 4516 kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a 4517 "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will 4518 not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the 4519 package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would 4520 use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file: 4521 :: 4522 4523 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123" 4524 4525 .. note:: 4526 4527 In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to 4528 explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake 4529 does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to 4530 satisfy the dependency. 4531 4532 Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen, 4533 keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine). 4534 4535 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4536 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4537 being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However, 4538 the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the 4539 packages being present. 4540 4541 This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4542 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4543 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4544 4545 The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable 4546 with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency 4547 on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will 4548 not build if a file in this list is not found. 4549 4550 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4551 for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4552 more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package 4553 containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to 4554 exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon 4555 finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the 4556 firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the 4557 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4558 :: 4559 4560 MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware" 4561 4562 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4563 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4564 being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image 4565 being built has no build dependency on this list of packages. 4566 4567 This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4568 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4569 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4570 4571 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable 4572 with the exception that the image being built does not have a build 4573 dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the 4574 image will build if a file in this list is not found. 4575 4576 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4577 For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4578 more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the 4579 package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the 4580 WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want 4581 the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package 4582 not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the 4583 module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the 4584 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4585 :: 4586 4587 MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi" 4588 4589 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` 4590 Specifies the list of hardware features the 4591 :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related 4592 information on enabling features, see the 4593 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`, 4594 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and 4595 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables. 4596 4597 For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as 4598 shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section. 4599 4600 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 4601 Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in 4602 ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 4603 4604 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 4605 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 4606 the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for 4607 all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" 4608 section for more information. 4609 4610 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 4611 Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 4612 backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See 4613 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 4614 4615 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES` 4616 A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current 4617 machine. By default, this list includes the value of 4618 :term:`MACHINE`. 4619 4620 You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that 4621 should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU 4622 (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named 4623 ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following 4624 override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``: 4625 :: 4626 4627 MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:" 4628 4629 This 4630 override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated 4631 in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf`` 4632 recipe: 4633 :: 4634 4635 SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \ 4636 file://wired-setup \ 4637 " 4638 4639 The underlying mechanism behind 4640 ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default 4641 value of :term:`OVERRIDES`. 4642 4643 :term:`MAINTAINER` 4644 The email address of the distribution maintainer. 4645 4646 :term:`MIRRORS` 4647 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 4648 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 4649 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 4650 build system tries locations defined by 4651 :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then 4652 locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order. 4653 4654 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 4655 the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the 4656 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 4657 4658 :term:`MLPREFIX` 4659 Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a 4660 special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The 4661 variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or 4662 removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable). 4663 ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``. 4664 4665 .. note:: 4666 4667 The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is 4668 historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix 4669 rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned 4670 into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well. 4671 4672 To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when 4673 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a 4674 ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version. 4675 If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other 4676 recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on 4677 "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on 4678 "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not 4679 get rewritten automatically: 4680 :: 4681 4682 do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo" 4683 4684 If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the 4685 following: 4686 :: 4687 4688 do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo" 4689 4690 module_autoload 4691 This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` 4692 variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload`` 4693 with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example: 4694 :: 4695 4696 module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm" 4697 4698 should now be replaced with: 4699 :: 4700 4701 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm" 4702 4703 See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information. 4704 4705 module_conf 4706 Specifies `modprobe.d <https://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_ 4707 syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` 4708 file. 4709 4710 You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the 4711 kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine 4712 configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file 4713 for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you 4714 must also be sure to list the module name in the 4715 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 4716 variable. 4717 4718 Here is the general syntax: 4719 :: 4720 4721 module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax" 4722 4723 You must use the kernel module name override. 4724 4725 Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on 4726 the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``. 4727 4728 Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to 4729 populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with 4730 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options 4731 ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``: 4732 :: 4733 4734 module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2" 4735 4736 For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on 4737 boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable. 4738 4739 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY` 4740 Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to 4741 "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the 4742 kernel modules resulting from a kernel build. 4743 4744 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME` 4745 The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4746 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4747 :: 4748 4749 MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 4750 4751 The value 4752 of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the 4753 same file, has the following value: 4754 :: 4755 4756 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 4757 4758 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information. 4759 4760 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME` 4761 The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4762 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4763 :: 4764 4765 MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 4766 4767 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 4768 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 4769 :: 4770 4771 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 4772 4773 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS` 4774 Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages 4775 are being built. This variable allows output for different types of 4776 target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same 4777 output directory. 4778 4779 The default value of this variable is: 4780 :: 4781 4782 ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS} 4783 4784 Some classes (e.g. 4785 :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the 4786 ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value. 4787 4788 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the 4789 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information. 4790 4791 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` 4792 A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the 4793 host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the 4794 ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For 4795 example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is 4796 "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the 4797 value resolves to "Unknown". 4798 4799 This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state 4800 packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with 4801 ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is 4802 checked against 4803 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that 4804 variable is set. 4805 4806 :term:`NM` 4807 The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``. 4808 4809 :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE` 4810 Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a 4811 recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many 4812 licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added 4813 occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files, 4814 which are only applicable to a specific package. 4815 ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does 4816 not exist in common licenses. 4817 4818 The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a 4819 recipe: 4820 :: 4821 4822 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source" 4823 4824 The following is an example that 4825 uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched 4826 source: 4827 :: 4828 4829 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt" 4830 4831 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` 4832 Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages. 4833 Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the 4834 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the 4835 ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on: :: 4836 4837 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1" 4838 4839 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 4840 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 4841 override: :: 4842 4843 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1" 4844 4845 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 4846 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 4847 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 4848 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 4849 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 4850 4851 .. note:: 4852 4853 Some recommended packages might be required for certain system 4854 functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add 4855 packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable. 4856 4857 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 4858 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 4859 4860 See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and 4861 the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for 4862 related information. 4863 4864 :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG` 4865 Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe 4866 requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the 4867 ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the 4868 content of the debug package. For example: 4869 :: 4870 4871 NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1" 4872 FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*" 4873 FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/" 4874 FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch" 4875 4876 :term:`OBJCOPY` 4877 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``. 4878 4879 :term:`OBJDUMP` 4880 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``. 4881 4882 :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE` 4883 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 4884 this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed" 4885 command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts 4886 that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class 4887 results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the 4888 ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will 4889 use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout. 4890 4891 See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the 4892 :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class 4893 applies these additional sed command arguments. For general 4894 information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the 4895 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 4896 4897 :term:`OE_IMPORTS` 4898 An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what 4899 Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system. 4900 4901 .. note:: 4902 4903 Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only. 4904 4905 :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT` 4906 The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of 4907 setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default 4908 value is "oe-init-build-env". 4909 4910 If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the 4911 ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name. 4912 4913 :term:`OE_TERMINAL` 4914 Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive 4915 terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake 4916 command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more 4917 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in 4918 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4919 4920 You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable: 4921 4922 - auto 4923 - gnome 4924 - xfce 4925 - rxvt 4926 - screen 4927 - konsole 4928 - none 4929 4930 :term:`OEROOT` 4931 The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script 4932 is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment 4933 setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this 4934 script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that 4935 contains the script. 4936 4937 For additional information on how this variable is used, see the 4938 initialization script. 4939 4940 :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL` 4941 Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced 4942 binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the 4943 Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``). 4944 4945 The default for this variable comes from the 4946 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this 4947 default by setting the variable in a custom distribution 4948 configuration file. 4949 4950 :term:`OVERRIDES` 4951 A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides 4952 are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively 4953 overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in 4954 ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes 4955 the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being 4956 built, and so forth. 4957 4958 As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in 4959 the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following 4960 assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the 4961 end of parsing: 4962 :: 4963 4964 FOO_an-override = "overridden" 4965 4966 See the 4967 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 4968 section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the 4969 overrides mechanism. 4970 4971 The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the 4972 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`, 4973 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and 4974 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another 4975 important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override 4976 allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration 4977 (``.conf``) files. Here is an example: 4978 :: 4979 4980 FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value" 4981 4982 .. note:: 4983 4984 An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES`` 4985 in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the 4986 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto 4987 Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 4988 4989 :term:`P` 4990 The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following: 4991 :: 4992 4993 ${PN}-${PV} 4994 4995 :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA` 4996 This variable defines additional metdata to add to packages. 4997 4998 You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages. 4999 This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as 5000 the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with 5001 the literal separator "\n". 5002 5003 The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable 5004 to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package 5005 specific by using the package name as a suffix. 5006 5007 You can find out more about applying this variable in the 5008 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`" 5009 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5010 5011 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 5012 The architecture of the resulting package or packages. 5013 5014 By default, the value of this variable is set to 5015 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the 5016 target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the 5017 build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the 5018 SDK. 5019 5020 .. note:: 5021 5022 See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information. 5023 5024 However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the 5025 target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the 5026 machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of 5027 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows: 5028 :: 5029 5030 PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}" 5031 5032 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS` 5033 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine. 5034 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 5035 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 5036 of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 5037 noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}". 5038 5039 :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN` 5040 Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so 5041 that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be 5042 included in the default package. 5043 5044 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` 5045 This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file 5046 found in the ``conf`` folder of the 5047 :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the 5048 OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data. 5049 5050 You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the 5051 variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk 5052 package_tar" 5053 5054 .. note:: 5055 5056 While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar`` 5057 class has limited functionality due to no support for package 5058 dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that 5059 you do not use it. 5060 5061 The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the 5062 package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages 5063 will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify. 5064 For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file: 5065 :: 5066 5067 PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk" 5068 5069 The OpenEmbedded build system uses 5070 the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK. 5071 5072 For information on packaging and build performance effects as a 5073 result of the package manager in use, see the 5074 ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section. 5075 5076 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 5077 Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when 5078 creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger 5079 (GDB). 5080 5081 With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control 5082 where debug information, which can include or exclude source files, 5083 is stored: 5084 5085 - ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a 5086 ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is 5087 installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are 5088 installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in 5089 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5090 5091 - "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under 5092 ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from 5093 where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is 5094 installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are 5095 installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in 5096 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5097 5098 - "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5099 described with the exception that no source files are installed. 5100 5101 - "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5102 described with the exception that all source files are placed in a 5103 separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior. 5104 5105 You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the 5106 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section 5107 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5108 5109 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5110 Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are 5111 installing complementary packages. 5112 5113 You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages 5114 when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you 5115 are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install 5116 ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a 5117 particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can 5118 use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular 5119 expressions to match the packages you want to exclude. 5120 5121 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` 5122 Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For 5123 example: 5124 :: 5125 5126 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 5127 5128 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 5129 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 5130 override: 5131 :: 5132 5133 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name" 5134 5135 If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some 5136 other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's 5137 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build 5138 system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system 5139 halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with 5140 an iterative development process to remove specific components from a 5141 system. 5142 5143 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 5144 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 5145 5146 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 5147 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for 5148 related information. 5149 5150 :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS` 5151 Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU. 5152 This variable is useful when you build for several different devices 5153 that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS. 5154 5155 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` 5156 Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the 5157 package feed URIs during the build. When used, the 5158 ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed 5159 URI, which is constructed using the 5160 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and 5161 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5162 variables. 5163 5164 .. note:: 5165 5166 You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` 5167 variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do 5168 not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common 5169 case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in 5170 all available architectures for the current machine being included 5171 into remote package feeds. 5172 5173 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5174 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5175 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5176 :: 5177 5178 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5179 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5180 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5181 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5182 5183 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5184 5185 .. code-block:: none 5186 5187 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5188 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5189 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5190 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5191 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5192 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5193 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5194 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5195 5196 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5197 Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The 5198 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a 5199 package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path 5200 lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5201 and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5202 5203 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5204 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5205 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5206 :: 5207 5208 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5209 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5210 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5211 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5212 5213 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5214 5215 .. code-block:: none 5216 5217 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5218 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5219 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5220 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5221 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5222 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5223 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5224 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5225 5226 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5227 Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the 5228 OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised 5229 of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5230 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and 5231 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5232 5233 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5234 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5235 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5236 :: 5237 5238 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5239 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5240 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5241 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5242 5243 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5244 5245 .. code-block:: none 5246 5247 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5248 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5249 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5250 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5251 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5252 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5253 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5254 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5255 5256 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` 5257 The final list of packages passed to the package manager for 5258 installation into the image. 5259 5260 Because the package manager controls actual installation of all 5261 packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is 5262 not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This 5263 variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in 5264 general, you should use the 5265 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify 5266 packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with 5267 the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 5268 image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image, 5269 use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an 5270 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 5271 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5272 5273 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY` 5274 Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts 5275 to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to 5276 install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable 5277 is generally not user-defined. 5278 5279 :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 5280 Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the 5281 :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out 5282 to individual packages. 5283 5284 :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS` 5285 Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and 5286 pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your 5287 post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs 5288 creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool 5289 in order to execute, you need to list the tools in 5290 ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``. 5291 5292 For information on running post-installation scripts, see the 5293 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`" 5294 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5295 5296 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` 5297 This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a 5298 recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in 5299 recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define 5300 feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over 5301 multiple lines for readability): 5302 :: 5303 5304 PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..." 5305 PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\ 5306 --with-f1, \ 5307 --without-f1, \ 5308 build-deps-for-f1, \ 5309 runtime-deps-for-f1, \ 5310 runtime-recommends-for-f1, \ 5311 packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1" 5312 PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\ 5313 ... and so on and so on ... 5314 5315 The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated 5316 list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can 5317 determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six 5318 order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can 5319 omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The 5320 order is important and specifies the following: 5321 5322 1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script 5323 argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 5324 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if 5325 the feature is enabled. 5326 5327 2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or 5328 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled. 5329 5330 3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`) 5331 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5332 5333 4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`) 5334 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5335 5336 5. Additional runtime recommendations 5337 (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if 5338 the feature is enabled. 5339 5340 6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG`` 5341 settings for this feature. 5342 5343 Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the 5344 ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has 5345 three arguments that determine the feature's behavior. 5346 :: 5347 5348 PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3" 5349 5350 The 5351 ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is 5352 enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure 5353 script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the 5354 other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend`` 5355 file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is 5356 added to the configure script instead. 5357 5358 The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true 5359 regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block. 5360 When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe. 5361 5362 If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do 5363 so one of two ways: 5364 5365 - *Append file:* Create an append file named 5366 recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of 5367 ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the 5368 variable: 5369 :: 5370 5371 PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5" 5372 5373 Or, you can just append the variable: 5374 :: 5375 5376 PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4" 5377 5378 - *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the 5379 block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf`` 5380 or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously 5381 described, you can either completely override the variable: 5382 :: 5383 5384 PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5" 5385 5386 Or, you can just amend the variable: 5387 :: 5388 5389 PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4" 5390 5391 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` 5392 A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the 5393 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting. 5394 5395 Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and 5396 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to 5397 pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``, 5398 respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that 5399 handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use 5400 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately. 5401 5402 :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5403 For recipes inheriting the 5404 :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting 5405 ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the 5406 normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth) 5407 should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe, 5408 which is the default behavior. 5409 5410 :term:`PACKAGES` 5411 The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the 5412 following: 5413 :: 5414 5415 ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN} 5416 5417 During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task 5418 goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES` 5419 variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the 5420 package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one 5421 package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest 5422 (leftmost) package. 5423 5424 Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of 5425 the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the 5426 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated, 5427 unless generation is forced through the 5428 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable. 5429 5430 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` 5431 A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for 5432 optional modules that are found in other recipes. 5433 ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it 5434 only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard, 5435 runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another 5436 package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` 5437 variable, but a package with the module name is never actually 5438 produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt 5439 to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency 5440 failure from the packaging system during the 5441 :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task. 5442 5443 Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and 5444 the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being 5445 satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 5446 (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``. 5447 5448 For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when 5449 you are splitting packages, see the 5450 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`" 5451 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5452 5453 :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS` 5454 Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of 5455 files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this 5456 variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to 5457 perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function 5458 should set :term:`PACKAGES`, 5459 :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and 5460 other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the 5461 desired splitting. 5462 5463 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 5464 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 5465 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify 5466 parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is 5467 usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of 5468 parallel threads ``make`` can run. 5469 5470 .. note:: 5471 5472 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be 5473 called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure 5474 this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5475 5476 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this 5477 variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses. 5478 5479 .. note:: 5480 5481 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5482 the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear 5483 the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For 5484 information on addressing race conditions, see the 5485 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5486 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5487 5488 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 5489 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 5490 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 5491 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is 5492 not set higher than "-j 20". 5493 5494 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 5495 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 5496 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5497 5498 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` 5499 Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the 5500 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify 5501 parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of 5502 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`. 5503 5504 .. note:: 5505 5506 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must 5507 be called with 5508 ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy 5509 way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5510 5511 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5512 the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can 5513 clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a 5514 workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the 5515 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5516 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5517 5518 :term:`PATCHRESOLVE` 5519 Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this 5520 variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user". 5521 5522 The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the 5523 OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting 5524 the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and 5525 places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the 5526 conflicts. 5527 5528 Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 5529 5530 :term:`PATCHTOOL` 5531 Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the 5532 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of 5533 three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used 5534 is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the 5535 quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being 5536 patched, it uses "patch". 5537 5538 If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in 5539 the recipe using one of the following: 5540 :: 5541 5542 PATCHTOOL = "patch" 5543 PATCHTOOL = "quilt" 5544 PATCHTOOL = "git" 5545 5546 :term:`PE` 5547 The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The 5548 variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme 5549 changes in some backwards incompatible way. 5550 5551 ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable. 5552 5553 :term:`PF` 5554 Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and 5555 revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and 5556 ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following: 5557 ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`} 5558 5559 :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES` 5560 When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>` 5561 class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf 5562 loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache`` 5563 class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 5564 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the 5565 loaders you need are in a package other than that main package. 5566 5567 :term:`PKG` 5568 The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build 5569 system. 5570 5571 .. note:: 5572 5573 When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override. 5574 5575 For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class 5576 renames the output package, it does so by setting 5577 ``PKG_packagename``. 5578 5579 :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH` 5580 The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context. 5581 ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment. 5582 5583 :term:`PKGD` 5584 Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before 5585 they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5586 the following: 5587 :: 5588 5589 ${WORKDIR}/package 5590 5591 Do not change this default. 5592 5593 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` 5594 Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated 5595 during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the 5596 :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data 5597 for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area. 5598 This directory defaults to the following, which you should not 5599 change: 5600 :: 5601 5602 ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata 5603 5604 For examples of how this data is used, see the 5605 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5606 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 5607 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``" 5608 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more 5609 information on the shared, global-state directory, see 5610 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 5611 5612 :term:`PKGDEST` 5613 Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they 5614 have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5615 the following: 5616 :: 5617 5618 ${WORKDIR}/packages-split 5619 5620 Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each 5621 package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change 5622 this default. 5623 5624 :term:`PKGDESTWORK` 5625 Points to a temporary work area where the 5626 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata. 5627 The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following: 5628 :: 5629 5630 ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata 5631 5632 Do not change this default. 5633 5634 The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the 5635 package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to 5636 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally. 5637 5638 :term:`PKGE` 5639 The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE`` 5640 is set to :term:`PE`. 5641 5642 :term:`PKGR` 5643 The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5644 ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`. 5645 5646 :term:`PKGV` 5647 The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5648 ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`. 5649 5650 :term:`PN` 5651 This variable can have two separate functions depending on the 5652 context: a recipe name or a resulting package name. 5653 5654 ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the 5655 OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is 5656 normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the 5657 recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN`` 5658 will be "expat". 5659 5660 The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file 5661 created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system. 5662 5663 If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix 5664 or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the 5665 native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build 5666 packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash`` 5667 and ``lib64-bash``, respectively. 5668 5669 :term:`PNBLACKLIST` 5670 Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build. 5671 This variable works in conjunction with the 5672 :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited 5673 globally. 5674 5675 To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST`` 5676 variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that 5677 prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built: 5678 :: 5679 5680 PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization." 5681 5682 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND` 5683 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5684 system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify 5685 functions separated by semicolons: 5686 :: 5687 5688 POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5689 5690 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5691 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5692 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5693 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5694 5695 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND` 5696 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5697 system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify 5698 functions separated by semicolons: 5699 :: 5700 5701 POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5702 5703 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5704 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5705 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5706 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5707 5708 :term:`PR` 5709 The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is 5710 "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the 5711 values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases, 5712 ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0". 5713 5714 .. note:: 5715 5716 The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR`` 5717 to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task 5718 :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the 5719 :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and 5720 :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache` 5721 mechanisms. 5722 5723 The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package 5724 manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In 5725 this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of 5726 :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which 5727 package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the 5728 same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with 5729 the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same 5730 upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including 5731 packaging fixes. 5732 5733 .. note:: 5734 5735 ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the 5736 package contents or metadata. 5737 5738 Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone, 5739 an automated solution exists. See the 5740 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section 5741 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 5742 5743 :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` 5744 If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines 5745 which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the 5746 preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the 5747 name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using 5748 the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common 5749 example: 5750 :: 5751 5752 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto" 5753 5754 In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel". 5755 The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of 5756 the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel". 5757 5758 Following are more examples: 5759 :: 5760 5761 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86" 5762 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa" 5763 5764 For more 5765 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`" 5766 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5767 5768 .. note:: 5769 5770 If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any 5771 recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined) 5772 by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually 5773 desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually 5774 exclusive alternative providers. 5775 5776 :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION` 5777 If multiple versions of recipes exist, this variable determines which 5778 version is given preference. You must always suffix the variable with 5779 the :term:`PN` you want to select, and you should set the 5780 :term:`PV` accordingly for precedence. 5781 5782 The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use 5783 through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any 5784 number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions 5785 that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are 5786 two examples: 5787 :: 5788 5789 PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0" 5790 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%" 5791 5792 .. note:: 5793 5794 The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the 5795 string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 5796 location of the string. 5797 5798 The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which 5799 does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename. 5800 For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb`` 5801 where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment: 5802 :: 5803 5804 PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}" 5805 5806 In this case, the correct way to select 5807 ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following: 5808 :: 5809 5810 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%" 5811 5812 Compare that previous example 5813 against the following incorrect example, which does not work: 5814 :: 5815 5816 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git" 5817 5818 Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by 5819 configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use 5820 :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific 5821 override. Here is an example: 5822 :: 5823 5824 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%" 5825 5826 Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the 5827 "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible. 5828 Here is an example: 5829 :: 5830 5831 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%" 5832 5833 .. note:: 5834 5835 The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override 5836 only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable". 5837 5838 :term:`PREMIRRORS` 5839 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 5840 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 5841 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 5842 build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream 5843 source, and then locations specified by 5844 :term:`MIRRORS` in that order. 5845 5846 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 5847 the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the 5848 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 5849 5850 Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to 5851 attempt before any others by adding something like the following to 5852 the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the 5853 :term:`Build Directory`: 5854 :: 5855 5856 PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\ 5857 git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5858 ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5859 http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5860 https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n" 5861 5862 These changes cause the 5863 build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and 5864 direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use 5865 ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as 5866 well. 5867 5868 :term:`PRIORITY` 5869 Indicates the importance of a package. 5870 5871 ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy 5872 because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for 5873 which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not 5874 normally set within recipes. 5875 5876 You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and 5877 "optional", which is the default. 5878 5879 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` 5880 Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored 5881 by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This 5882 variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has 5883 its own private versions of a library normally provided by another 5884 recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the 5885 private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated 5886 packages that should instead depend on the package providing the 5887 standard version of the library. 5888 5889 Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their 5890 file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser: 5891 :: 5892 5893 PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \ 5894 libxpcom.so \ 5895 libnspr4.so \ 5896 libxul.so \ 5897 libmozalloc.so \ 5898 libplc4.so \ 5899 libplds4.so" 5900 5901 For more information, see the 5902 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5903 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 5904 5905 :term:`PROVIDES` 5906 A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By 5907 default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its 5908 ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it 5909 provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional 5910 aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying 5911 dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by 5912 ``DEPENDS``. 5913 5914 Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe 5915 file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``: 5916 :: 5917 5918 PROVIDES += "udev" 5919 5920 The ``PROVIDES`` statement 5921 results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev". 5922 5923 .. note:: 5924 5925 A recipe's own recipe name (:term:`PN`) is always implicitly prepended 5926 to `PROVIDES`, so while using "+=" in the above example may not be 5927 strictly necessary it is recommended to avoid confusion. 5928 5929 In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the 5930 ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A 5931 virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular 5932 functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the 5933 functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``. 5934 Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the 5935 virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open. 5936 5937 Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form 5938 "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part 5939 of the name and has no syntactical significance. 5940 5941 The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is 5942 used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target. 5943 5944 .. note:: 5945 5946 A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies 5947 (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any 5948 special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For 5949 example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of 5950 the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory. 5951 5952 Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as 5953 simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file: 5954 :: 5955 5956 VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev" 5957 5958 5959 :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 5960 The network based :term:`PR` service host and port. 5961 5962 The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the 5963 :term:`Source Directory` shows how the 5964 ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set: 5965 :: 5966 5967 PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0" 5968 5969 You must 5970 set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR 5971 service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can 5972 set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service. 5973 5974 5975 :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS` 5976 A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored 5977 by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid 5978 problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and 5979 reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list 5980 and can include partial directory (or file) names. 5981 5982 5983 :term:`PTEST_ENABLED` 5984 Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package 5985 Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest) 5986 functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set 5987 this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests 5988 at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it 5989 from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. 5990 5991 :term:`PV` 5992 The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the 5993 recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named 5994 ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1". 5995 ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is 5996 building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code 5997 repository (e.g. Git or Subversion). 5998 5999 ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable. 6000 6001 :term:`PYTHON_ABI` 6002 When used by recipes that inherit the 6003 :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 6004 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 6005 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 6006 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, denotes the 6007 Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By 6008 default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the 6009 OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you. 6010 6011 The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory 6012 names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in 6013 sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``). 6014 6015 Recipes that inherit the ``distutils`` class during cross-builds also 6016 use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the 6017 appropriate Python that the extension is targeting. 6018 6019 :term:`PYTHON_PN` 6020 When used by recipes that inherit the 6021 `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 6022 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 6023 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 6024 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, specifies the 6025 major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would 6026 be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the 6027 OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you. 6028 6029 The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the 6030 following: 6031 :: 6032 6033 DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native" 6034 6035 In the previous example, 6036 the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``. 6037 6038 :term:`RANLIB` 6039 The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``. 6040 6041 :term:`RCONFLICTS` 6042 The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages 6043 will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed. 6044 6045 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 6046 conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6047 :: 6048 6049 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name" 6050 6051 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6052 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6053 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6054 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6055 ``RCONFLICTS`` variable: 6056 :: 6057 6058 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6059 6060 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6061 6062 - = 6063 - < 6064 - > 6065 - <= 6066 - >= 6067 6068 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6069 greater of the package ``foo``: 6070 :: 6071 6072 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6073 6074 :term:`RDEPENDS` 6075 Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other 6076 packages that must be installed in order for the package to function 6077 correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the 6078 package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be 6079 installed: 6080 :: 6081 6082 RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz" 6083 6084 The most common types of package 6085 runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore, 6086 most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information, 6087 see the 6088 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 6089 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 6090 6091 The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that 6092 ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the 6093 package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the 6094 :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks. 6095 Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used, 6096 which is determined by 6097 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the 6098 corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to 6099 also install the packages on which it depends. 6100 6101 To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the 6102 previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be 6103 added. This dependency is from the recipe's 6104 :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with 6105 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the 6106 ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and 6107 ``baz``. 6108 6109 The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the 6110 names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although 6111 package names and recipe names usually match, the important point 6112 here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS`` 6113 variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from 6114 a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable. 6115 6116 Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6117 you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package 6118 name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For 6119 example, suppose you are building a development package that depends 6120 on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following 6121 ``RDEPENDS`` statement: 6122 :: 6123 6124 RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl" 6125 6126 In the example, 6127 the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the 6128 ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of 6129 the variable. 6130 6131 .. note:: 6132 6133 ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` 6134 by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file 6135 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove 6136 ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator 6137 rather than the "=" operator. 6138 6139 The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would 6140 in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable 6141 allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the 6142 :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename 6143 packages), but this final package name cannot be used with 6144 ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be 6145 independent of the package format used. 6146 6147 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6148 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6149 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6150 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6151 ``RDEPENDS`` variable: 6152 :: 6153 6154 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6155 6156 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6157 6158 - = 6159 - < 6160 - > 6161 - <= 6162 - >= 6163 6164 For version, provide the version number. 6165 6166 .. note:: 6167 6168 You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version 6169 specification. 6170 6171 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6172 greater of the package ``foo``: 6173 :: 6174 6175 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6176 6177 For information on build-time dependencies, see the 6178 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 6179 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 6180 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 6181 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 6182 dependencies. 6183 6184 :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES` 6185 When inheriting the 6186 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 6187 class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist 6188 in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build 6189 system to build the recipe. In other words, if the 6190 ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not 6191 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 6192 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 6193 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 6194 6195 :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE` 6196 With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes 6197 whose work directories should not be removed. See the 6198 ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more 6199 details. 6200 6201 :term:`ROOT_HOME` 6202 Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as 6203 follows in the BitBake configuration file: 6204 :: 6205 6206 ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root" 6207 6208 .. note:: 6209 6210 This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions 6211 prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep 6212 writeable data in one place. 6213 6214 You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or 6215 in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak" 6216 assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to 6217 define your override: 6218 :: 6219 6220 ROOT_HOME = "/root" 6221 ROOT_HOME ?= "/root" 6222 6223 These 6224 override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly 6225 used override. 6226 6227 :term:`ROOTFS` 6228 Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem. 6229 6230 The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the 6231 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 6232 6233 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND` 6234 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6235 system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by 6236 semicolons: 6237 :: 6238 6239 ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6240 6241 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6242 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6243 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6244 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6245 information. 6246 6247 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6248 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6249 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6250 separated by semicolons: 6251 :: 6252 6253 ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6254 6255 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6256 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6257 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6258 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6259 information. 6260 6261 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND` 6262 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6263 system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package 6264 management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed 6265 including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``. 6266 You can specify functions separated by semicolons: 6267 :: 6268 6269 ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6270 6271 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6272 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6273 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6274 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6275 information. 6276 6277 :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 6278 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 6279 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6280 separated by semicolons: 6281 :: 6282 6283 ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6284 6285 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6286 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6287 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6288 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6289 information. 6290 6291 :term:`RPROVIDES` 6292 A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These 6293 aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other 6294 packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by 6295 ``RDEPENDS``). 6296 6297 .. note:: 6298 6299 A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list. 6300 6301 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the 6302 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6303 example: 6304 :: 6305 6306 RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2" 6307 6308 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 6309 A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being 6310 built. The package being built does not depend on this list of 6311 packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for 6312 extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see 6313 the ``RDEPENDS`` variable. 6314 6315 The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS`` 6316 list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can 6317 prevent listed packages from being installed by using the 6318 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`, 6319 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and 6320 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables. 6321 6322 Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced. 6323 However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either 6324 through the :term:`PACKAGES` or 6325 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the 6326 :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur 6327 during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not 6328 produced, the build continues without error. 6329 6330 Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6331 you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the 6332 particular package whose usability is being extended. For example, 6333 suppose you are building a development package that is extended to 6334 support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the 6335 following: 6336 :: 6337 6338 RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name" 6339 6340 In the 6341 example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in 6342 the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package 6343 by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``. 6344 6345 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6346 specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending 6347 on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you. 6348 Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6349 ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable: 6350 :: 6351 6352 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6353 6354 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6355 6356 - = 6357 - < 6358 - > 6359 - <= 6360 - >= 6361 6362 For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or 6363 greater of the package ``foo``: 6364 :: 6365 6366 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6367 6368 :term:`RREPLACES` 6369 A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses 6370 this variable to determine which package should be installed to 6371 replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the 6372 other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of 6373 the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable. 6374 6375 As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable 6376 in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6377 :: 6378 6379 RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced" 6380 6381 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6382 specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies 6383 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6384 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6385 ``RREPLACES`` variable: 6386 :: 6387 6388 RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6389 6390 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6391 6392 - = 6393 - < 6394 - > 6395 - <= 6396 - >= 6397 6398 For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2 6399 or greater of the package ``foo``: 6400 :: 6401 6402 RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6403 6404 :term:`RSUGGESTS` 6405 A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation 6406 by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all 6407 package managers support this functionality. 6408 6409 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this 6410 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6411 example: 6412 :: 6413 6414 RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package" 6415 6416 :term:`S` 6417 The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where 6418 unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is 6419 ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``, 6420 where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe 6421 version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named 6422 anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is 6423 fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set 6424 ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where 6425 to find the unpacked source. 6426 6427 As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory` 6428 top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at 6429 ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system 6430 uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following: 6431 :: 6432 6433 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19 6434 6435 The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder. 6436 6437 This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git 6438 repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during 6439 :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different 6440 from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the 6441 source can be located: 6442 :: 6443 6444 SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git" 6445 S = "${WORKDIR}/git" 6446 6447 :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES` 6448 Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for 6449 during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If 6450 any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then 6451 BitBake immediately exits with an error. 6452 6453 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` 6454 A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has 6455 been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID 6456 followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or 6457 as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with 6458 explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is 6459 not empty and the current value of 6460 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the 6461 list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the 6462 current host distribution has not been tested as a build host. 6463 6464 :term:`SDK_ARCH` 6465 The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly 6466 set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`. 6467 6468 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` 6469 The directory set up and used by the 6470 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which 6471 the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines 6472 ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows: 6473 :: 6474 6475 SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk" 6476 6477 :term:`SDK_DIR` 6478 The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when 6479 creating SDK output. The 6480 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines 6481 the variable as follows: 6482 :: 6483 6484 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6485 6486 .. note:: 6487 6488 The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6489 ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6490 6491 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` 6492 Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the 6493 extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the 6494 required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value 6495 "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK. 6496 6497 .. note:: 6498 6499 If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure 6500 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the 6501 artifacts to be fetched as needed. 6502 6503 :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST` 6504 The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all 6505 the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The 6506 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6507 follows: 6508 :: 6509 6510 packagename packagearch version 6511 6512 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6513 defines the manifest file as follows: 6514 :: 6515 6516 SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest" 6517 6518 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6519 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6520 6521 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA` 6522 When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes 6523 in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data 6524 allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search 6525 results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map 6526 dependencies more effectively. 6527 6528 .. note:: 6529 6530 Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`` 6531 variable significantly increases build time because all of world 6532 needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases 6533 the size of the extensible SDK. 6534 6535 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN` 6536 When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible 6537 SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when 6538 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep 6539 the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable 6540 toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an 6541 IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional 6542 steps to install the toolchain. 6543 6544 The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if 6545 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if 6546 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full". 6547 6548 :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST` 6549 A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT` 6550 value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The 6551 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the 6552 default value: 6553 :: 6554 6555 SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc" 6556 6557 Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK 6558 context. You can use this variable to disable those classes. 6559 6560 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6561 configuration, see the 6562 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6563 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6564 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6565 6566 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6567 A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6568 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually, 6569 these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the 6570 build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic 6571 within the extensible SDK. 6572 6573 By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the 6574 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and 6575 excludes the following variables: 6576 6577 - :term:`CONF_VERSION` 6578 - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 6579 - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS` 6580 - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 6581 - :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 6582 - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR` 6583 - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR` 6584 - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 6585 6586 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6587 configuration, see the 6588 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6589 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6590 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6591 6592 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST` 6593 A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6594 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By 6595 default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the 6596 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class. 6597 6598 This list overrides the variables specified using the 6599 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6600 variable as well as any variables identified by automatic 6601 blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the 6602 value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not 6603 be valid on the system where the SDK is installed. 6604 6605 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6606 configuration, see the 6607 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6608 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6609 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6610 6611 :term:`SDK_NAME` 6612 The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the 6613 :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`, 6614 :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6615 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and 6616 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables: 6617 :: 6618 6619 SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}" 6620 6621 :term:`SDK_OS` 6622 Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The 6623 default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`. 6624 6625 :term:`SDK_OUTPUT` 6626 The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK 6627 output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` 6628 class defines the variable as follows: 6629 :: 6630 6631 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6632 SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image" 6633 SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk" 6634 6635 .. note:: 6636 6637 The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6638 :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is 6639 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6640 6641 :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS` 6642 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine. 6643 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 6644 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 6645 of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 6646 noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}". 6647 6648 :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6649 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6650 system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by 6651 semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6652 6653 If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you 6654 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 6655 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 6656 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 6657 6658 :term:`SDK_PREFIX` 6659 The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The 6660 OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the 6661 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building 6662 ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-". 6663 6664 :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS` 6665 A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default, 6666 the following tasks are added: 6667 6668 - do_populate_lic 6669 - do_package_qa 6670 - do_populate_sysroot 6671 - do_deploy 6672 6673 Despite the default value of "" for the 6674 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added 6675 to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the 6676 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional 6677 tasks that are needed in order to build 6678 :term:`SDK_TARGETS`). 6679 6680 :term:`SDK_SYS` 6681 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 6682 system, for which the SDK will be built. 6683 6684 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 6685 on :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6686 :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and 6687 :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS`` 6688 variable yourself. 6689 6690 :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST` 6691 The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all 6692 the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The 6693 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6694 follows: 6695 :: 6696 6697 packagename packagearch version 6698 6699 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6700 defines the manifest file as follows: 6701 :: 6702 6703 SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest" 6704 6705 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6706 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6707 6708 :term:`SDK_TARGETS` 6709 A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the 6710 standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}" 6711 (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built). 6712 6713 The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically 6714 would not be changed. 6715 6716 :term:`SDK_TITLE` 6717 The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default, 6718 this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or 6719 :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the 6720 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6721 follows: 6722 :: 6723 6724 SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK" 6725 6726 For the default distribution "poky", 6727 ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)". 6728 6729 For information on how to change this default title, see the 6730 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`" 6731 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6732 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6733 6734 :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL` 6735 An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set, 6736 the value is used as the default update server when running 6737 ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK. 6738 6739 :term:`SDK_VENDOR` 6740 Specifies the name of the SDK vendor. 6741 6742 :term:`SDK_VERSION` 6743 Specifies the version of the SDK. The distribution configuration file 6744 (e.g. ``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) defines the 6745 ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows: 6746 :: 6747 6748 SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}" 6749 6750 For additional information, see the 6751 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and 6752 :term:`DATE` variables. 6753 6754 :term:`SDKEXTPATH` 6755 The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By 6756 default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO` 6757 variable and is set in the 6758 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6759 follows: 6760 :: 6761 6762 SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk" 6763 6764 For the 6765 default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk". 6766 6767 For information on how to change this default directory, see the 6768 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`" 6769 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6770 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6771 6772 :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES` 6773 Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to 6774 the SDK generated from an image using the following command: 6775 :: 6776 6777 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 6778 6779 :term:`SDKMACHINE` 6780 The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is 6781 built such that it runs on the target you specify with the 6782 ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf`` 6783 file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``. 6784 6785 You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable. 6786 The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in 6787 the Build Directory. 6788 :: 6789 6790 SDKMACHINE ?= "i686" 6791 6792 .. note:: 6793 6794 You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE`` 6795 variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the 6796 configuration will not take affect. 6797 6798 :term:`SDKPATH` 6799 Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that 6800 is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as 6801 the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's 6802 installation script. You can override the offered path when you run 6803 the script. 6804 6805 :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT` 6806 The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK 6807 as it will be when installed into the default 6808 :term:`SDKPATH`. 6809 6810 :term:`SECTION` 6811 The section in which packages should be categorized. Package 6812 management utilities can make use of this variable. 6813 6814 :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION` 6815 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 6816 building for the target. The flags are passed through the default 6817 value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable. 6818 6819 The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of 6820 ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the 6821 case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used. 6822 6823 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE` 6824 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6825 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6826 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6827 separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device: 6828 :: 6829 6830 SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0" 6831 6832 .. note:: 6833 6834 The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the 6835 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable. 6836 6837 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` 6838 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6839 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6840 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6841 separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices: 6842 :: 6843 6844 SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1" 6845 6846 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK` 6847 Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in 6848 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against 6849 ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable 6850 allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was 6851 listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in 6852 ``/proc/console``, you would do the following: :: 6853 6854 SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0" 6855 6856 This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not 6857 with systemd). 6858 6859 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS` 6860 A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine 6861 signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from 6862 another recipe. For example: :: 6863 6864 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2" 6865 6866 In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``. 6867 6868 You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the 6869 dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand 6870 side. Here is an example: :: 6871 6872 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native" 6873 6874 In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore 6875 task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining 6876 their task signatures. 6877 6878 Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that 6879 affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes. 6880 6881 .. note:: 6882 6883 If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship, 6884 the software might break during runtime if the interface of the 6885 second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built. 6886 6887 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE` 6888 A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change. 6889 The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the 6890 tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to 6891 remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task 6892 signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes. 6893 6894 .. note:: 6895 6896 If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software 6897 might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed 6898 after the other had been built. 6899 6900 :term:`SITEINFO_BITS` 6901 Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value 6902 should be either "32" or "64". 6903 6904 :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS` 6905 Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value 6906 should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian. 6907 6908 :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS` 6909 Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM 6910 package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing 6911 prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``. 6912 6913 To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your 6914 ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your: 6915 :term:`Build Directory`. 6916 :: 6917 6918 SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1" 6919 6920 :term:`SOC_FAMILY` 6921 Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On 6922 Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that 6923 you include in the configuration files of all the machines. 6924 6925 .. note:: 6926 6927 You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this 6928 variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. 6929 6930 :term:`SOLIBS` 6931 Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform. 6932 By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is 6933 defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6934 6935 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6936 ``FILES_${PN}``. 6937 6938 :term:`SOLIBSDEV` 6939 Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for 6940 shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is 6941 ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the 6942 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6943 6944 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6945 ``FILES_${PN}-dev``. 6946 6947 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH` 6948 When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e. 6949 creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in 6950 your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all 6951 recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is 6952 compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered 6953 incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or 6954 both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 6955 variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables 6956 specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current 6957 machine or host. 6958 6959 .. note:: 6960 6961 Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` 6962 variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words, 6963 do not set the variable during a normal build. 6964 6965 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` 6966 Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to 6967 first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream 6968 specified in :term:`SRC_URI`. 6969 6970 To use this variable, you must globally inherit the 6971 :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide 6972 the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax: 6973 :: 6974 6975 INHERIT += "own-mirrors" 6976 SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror" 6977 6978 .. note:: 6979 6980 You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``. 6981 6982 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` 6983 Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in 6984 ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP`` 6985 mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file. 6986 6987 For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE` 6988 variable. 6989 6990 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` 6991 A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded 6992 build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list 6993 specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such 6994 as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable. 6995 6996 :term:`SPL_BINARY` 6997 The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices 6998 use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development 6999 board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL 7000 binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the 7001 U-Boot recipe. 7002 7003 The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc`` 7004 file as follows: 7005 :: 7006 7007 # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that 7008 # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the 7009 # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables 7010 # to allow packaging the SPL. 7011 SPL_BINARY ?= "" 7012 SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}" 7013 SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}" 7014 SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}" 7015 7016 The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form 7017 various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system. 7018 7019 See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the 7020 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`" 7021 section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide 7022 for additional information. 7023 7024 :term:`SRC_URI` 7025 The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the 7026 OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how 7027 to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs 7028 to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses 7029 a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or 7030 append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include 7031 a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances 7032 of the variable. 7033 7034 The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI 7035 protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher 7036 submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL 7037 parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see 7038 the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the 7039 BitBake User Manual. 7040 7041 - ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped 7042 with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g. 7043 :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files). 7044 The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH` 7045 variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the 7046 following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of 7047 the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file 7048 (``.bbappend``) resides: 7049 7050 - ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix 7051 or version numbers. 7052 7053 - ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and 7054 version but without any special package name suffix. 7055 7056 - *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files`` 7057 and is also alongside the recipe or append file. 7058 7059 .. note:: 7060 7061 If you want the build system to pick up files specified through 7062 a 7063 SRC_URI 7064 statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend 7065 the 7066 FILESPATH 7067 variable by also using the 7068 FILESEXTRAPATHS 7069 variable from within your append file. 7070 7071 - ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control 7072 repository. 7073 7074 - ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control 7075 repository. 7076 7077 - ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service) 7078 revision control repository. 7079 7080 - ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository. 7081 7082 - ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository. 7083 7084 - ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``. 7085 7086 - ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``. 7087 7088 - ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``. 7089 7090 - ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control 7091 repository. 7092 7093 - ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision 7094 control repository. 7095 7096 - ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision 7097 control repository. 7098 7099 - ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell. 7100 7101 - ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision 7102 control repository. 7103 7104 - ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry. 7105 7106 Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are 7107 standard options: 7108 7109 - ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default 7110 action is to apply the patch. 7111 7112 - ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the 7113 patch. The default level is 1. 7114 7115 - ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should 7116 be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``. 7117 7118 Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision 7119 control system: 7120 7121 - ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if 7122 :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than 7123 ``mindate``. 7124 7125 - ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later 7126 than ``maxdate``. 7127 7128 - ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or 7129 greater than ``minrev``. 7130 7131 - ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later 7132 than ``maxrev``. 7133 7134 - ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to 7135 ``rev``. 7136 7137 - ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to 7138 ``rev``. 7139 7140 Here are some additional options worth mentioning: 7141 7142 - ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is 7143 an archive. The default action is to unpack the file. 7144 7145 - ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7146 the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when 7147 the Git fetcher is used. 7148 7149 - ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the 7150 specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``) 7151 fetcher is used. 7152 7153 - ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7154 the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is 7155 used. 7156 7157 - ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the 7158 tree when using the Git fetcher is used. 7159 7160 - ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with 7161 ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one 7162 file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example: 7163 :: 7164 7165 SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \ 7166 git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \ 7167 http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third" 7168 7169 SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15" 7170 SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f" 7171 SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de" 7172 7173 7174 - ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing 7175 the downloaded file. 7176 7177 :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH` 7178 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects 7179 whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so, 7180 the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this 7181 variable to "0" disables this behavior. 7182 7183 :term:`SRCDATE` 7184 The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable 7185 applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager 7186 (SCM). 7187 7188 :term:`SRCPV` 7189 Returns the version string of the current package. This string is 7190 used to help define the value of :term:`PV`. 7191 7192 The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7193 configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as 7194 follows: 7195 :: 7196 7197 SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}" 7198 7199 Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the 7200 ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``) 7201 located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory 7202 defines ``PV`` as follows: 7203 :: 7204 7205 PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}" 7206 7207 :term:`SRCREV` 7208 The revision of the source code used to build the package. This 7209 variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note 7210 that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid 7211 performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses 7212 your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision 7213 identifier and not just a tag. 7214 7215 .. note:: 7216 7217 For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision 7218 of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable 7219 description and the 7220 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 7221 section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7222 7223 :term:`SSTATE_DIR` 7224 The directory for the shared state cache. 7225 7226 :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK` 7227 If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in 7228 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when 7229 fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to 7230 "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if 7231 you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for 7232 your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching 7233 from the network. 7234 7235 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` 7236 Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror 7237 locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the 7238 data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS` 7239 and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache 7240 locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects. 7241 7242 You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP 7243 or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state 7244 cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache 7245 you point to can also be from builds on other machines. 7246 7247 When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses 7248 a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure 7249 ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search 7250 paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account 7251 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the 7252 :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the 7253 following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the 7254 server-provided path server_url_sstate_path: 7255 :: 7256 7257 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n" 7258 7259 If a mirror uses the same structure as 7260 :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the 7261 end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the 7262 correct path within the directory structure. 7263 :: 7264 7265 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\ 7266 file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \ 7267 file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH" 7268 7269 :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES` 7270 Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for 7271 hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated 7272 list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters 7273 allowed. 7274 7275 During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state 7276 (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots. 7277 That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation 7278 locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled 7279 by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files 7280 they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather 7281 than the variable being comprehensively set. The 7282 :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list 7283 of files. 7284 7285 For details on the process, see the 7286 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. 7287 7288 :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7289 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7290 directory for the build host. 7291 7292 :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR` 7293 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7294 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7295 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7296 7297 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR` 7298 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7299 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7300 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7301 7302 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS` 7303 Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration 7304 scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other 7305 software that wants to make use of libraries or include files 7306 provided by the software associated with the script. 7307 7308 .. note:: 7309 7310 This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by 7311 ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the 7312 library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use 7313 ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script. 7314 7315 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE` 7316 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7317 directory for the build host. 7318 7319 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR` 7320 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7321 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7322 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7323 7324 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE` 7325 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7326 directory for the build host. 7327 7328 :term:`STAGING_DIR` 7329 Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used 7330 during packaging. 7331 7332 For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs, 7333 see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` 7334 task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`" 7335 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the 7336 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`" 7337 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the 7338 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable. 7339 7340 .. note:: 7341 7342 Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR`` 7343 directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the 7344 directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to 7345 ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 7346 task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of 7347 those files into the sysroot. 7348 7349 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST` 7350 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which 7351 the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component). 7352 For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's 7353 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies 7354 files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the 7355 ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses 7356 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on 7357 the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can 7358 have the following values: 7359 7360 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7361 "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}". 7362 7363 - For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty 7364 given the assumption that when building for the build host, the 7365 build host's own directories should be used. 7366 7367 .. note:: 7368 7369 ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such 7370 as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into 7371 ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes, 7372 standard build environment variables such as 7373 :term:`CPPFLAGS` and 7374 :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths 7375 and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and 7376 headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option. 7377 7378 Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables 7379 should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as 7380 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`, 7381 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and 7382 :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system 7383 root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense 7384 for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and 7385 libraries. 7386 7387 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE` 7388 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building 7389 components that run on the build host itself. 7390 7391 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` 7392 Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the 7393 component generates code. For components that do not generate code, 7394 which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match 7395 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 7396 7397 Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but 7398 those binaries in turn generate code for another different system 7399 (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the 7400 primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or 7401 different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries 7402 run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET" 7403 system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used 7404 for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the 7405 sysroot used for the "TARGET" system. 7406 7407 :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE` 7408 Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7409 directory for the build host. 7410 7411 :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR` 7412 Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7413 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7414 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7415 7416 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR` 7417 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7418 sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being 7419 built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7420 7421 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE` 7422 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7423 sysroot directory for the build host. 7424 7425 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR` 7426 Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts. 7427 Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts 7428 (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with 7429 the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts 7430 after the kernel has been built. 7431 7432 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` 7433 The directory with kernel headers that are required to build 7434 out-of-tree modules. 7435 7436 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR` 7437 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7438 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7439 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7440 7441 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7442 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7443 directory for the build host. 7444 7445 :term:`STAMP` 7446 Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path 7447 to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and 7448 then appending additional information. Currently, the default 7449 assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7450 file is: 7451 :: 7452 7453 STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}" 7454 7455 For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a 7456 task should be rerun, see the 7457 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`" 7458 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 7459 7460 See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`, 7461 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`, 7462 :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`, 7463 :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable 7464 information. 7465 7466 :term:`STAMPS_DIR` 7467 Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system 7468 places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``. 7469 7470 :term:`STRIP` 7471 The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to 7472 strip symbols. 7473 7474 :term:`SUMMARY` 7475 The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for 7476 packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default, 7477 ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the 7478 :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is 7479 not set in the recipe. 7480 7481 :term:`SVNDIR` 7482 The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are 7483 stored. 7484 7485 :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE` 7486 Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a 7487 console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as 7488 follows where "X" is the console number you want to use: 7489 :: 7490 7491 SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX" 7492 7493 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets 7494 this variable to null but then checks for a value later. 7495 7496 :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS` 7497 Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set 7498 this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options, 7499 separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``). 7500 7501 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable 7502 to create a set of options. 7503 7504 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL` 7505 Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off 7506 serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The 7507 variable's default value is set in the 7508 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7509 :: 7510 7511 SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200" 7512 7513 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7514 7515 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY` 7516 Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The 7517 variable's default value is set in the 7518 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7519 :: 7520 7521 SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200" 7522 7523 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7524 7525 :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH` 7526 An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when 7527 you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe. 7528 7529 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this 7530 variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the 7531 splash screen. 7532 7533 :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR` 7534 Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default 7535 "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``") 7536 where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the 7537 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. 7538 7539 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` 7540 Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the 7541 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By 7542 default, the following directories are staged: 7543 :: 7544 7545 SYSROOT_DIRS = " \ 7546 ${includedir} \ 7547 ${libdir} \ 7548 ${base_libdir} \ 7549 ${nonarch_base_libdir} \ 7550 ${datadir} \ 7551 " 7552 7553 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST` 7554 Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the 7555 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You 7556 can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of 7557 directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from 7558 staging. By default, the following directories are not staged: 7559 :: 7560 7561 SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \ 7562 ${mandir} \ 7563 ${docdir} \ 7564 ${infodir} \ 7565 ${datadir}/locale \ 7566 ${datadir}/applications \ 7567 ${datadir}/fonts \ 7568 ${datadir}/pixmaps \ 7569 " 7570 7571 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE` 7572 Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the 7573 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for 7574 ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in 7575 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following 7576 extra directories are staged: 7577 :: 7578 7579 SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \ 7580 ${bindir} \ 7581 ${sbindir} \ 7582 ${base_bindir} \ 7583 ${base_sbindir} \ 7584 ${libexecdir} \ 7585 ${sysconfdir} \ 7586 ${localstatedir} \ 7587 " 7588 7589 .. note:: 7590 7591 Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot 7592 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories 7593 containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged. 7594 7595 :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 7596 A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the 7597 sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional 7598 processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files. 7599 7600 :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE` 7601 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7602 this variable specifies whether the specified service in 7603 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start 7604 automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to 7605 automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the 7606 :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows: 7607 :: 7608 7609 SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable" 7610 7611 You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable". 7612 7613 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG` 7614 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7615 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the 7616 configuration file that should be used. By default, the 7617 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7618 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows: 7619 :: 7620 7621 SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf" 7622 7623 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7624 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7625 7626 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES` 7627 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7628 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a 7629 list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot 7630 entry per file. By default, the 7631 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7632 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows: 7633 :: 7634 7635 SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= "" 7636 7637 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7638 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7639 7640 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT` 7641 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7642 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the 7643 boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the 7644 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7645 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows: 7646 :: 7647 7648 SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10" 7649 7650 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7651 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7652 7653 :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES` 7654 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7655 this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found 7656 in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` 7657 variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to 7658 reside in the recipes main package: 7659 :: 7660 7661 SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}" 7662 7663 If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need 7664 to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which 7665 the build system can find the systemd unit files. 7666 7667 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` 7668 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7669 this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package. 7670 7671 When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name 7672 override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is 7673 an example from the connman recipe: 7674 :: 7675 7676 SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service" 7677 7678 :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS` 7679 When using 7680 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 7681 specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should 7682 run a `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ 7683 (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to 7684 "0". 7685 7686 The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only 7687 run a getty on the first virtual terminal). 7688 7689 :term:`T` 7690 This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary 7691 files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a 7692 particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows: 7693 :: 7694 7695 T = "${WORKDIR}/temp" 7696 7697 The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which 7698 BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf`` 7699 file sets this variable. 7700 7701 The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the 7702 :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of 7703 the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire 7704 build. 7705 7706 :term:`TARGET_ARCH` 7707 The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system 7708 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 7709 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 7710 configurable: 7711 7712 - arm 7713 - i586 7714 - x86_64 7715 - powerpc 7716 - powerpc64 7717 - mips 7718 - mipsel 7719 7720 For additional information on machine architectures, see the 7721 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable. 7722 7723 :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH` 7724 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 7725 system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from 7726 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake 7727 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7728 :: 7729 7730 TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}" 7731 7732 :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` 7733 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 7734 system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from 7735 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default. 7736 7737 .. note:: 7738 7739 It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to 7740 ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that 7741 would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable. 7742 7743 :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH` 7744 This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application 7745 Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for 7746 cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not 7747 compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`` 7748 variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a 7749 different configuration. See the 7750 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the 7751 :term:`Source Directory` for an example. 7752 7753 :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` 7754 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 7755 target. When building in the target context, 7756 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 7757 default. 7758 7759 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS`` 7760 variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that 7761 executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied. 7762 7763 :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` 7764 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 7765 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building 7766 in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the 7767 value of this variable by default. 7768 7769 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7770 ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS`` 7771 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7772 applied. 7773 7774 :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` 7775 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 7776 target. When building in the target context, 7777 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7778 by default. 7779 7780 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7781 ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS`` 7782 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7783 applied. 7784 7785 :term:`TARGET_FPU` 7786 Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets, 7787 which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If 7788 not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance 7789 penalty. 7790 7791 :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH` 7792 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 7793 ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from 7794 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake 7795 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7796 :: 7797 7798 TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}" 7799 7800 :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` 7801 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the 7802 target. When building in the target context, 7803 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7804 by default. 7805 7806 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7807 :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the 7808 ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also 7809 have the flags applied. 7810 7811 :term:`TARGET_OS` 7812 Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to 7813 "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl" 7814 for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and 7815 "linux-musleabi" possible values exist. 7816 7817 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` 7818 Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools. 7819 7820 Depending on the type of recipe and the build target, 7821 ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows: 7822 7823 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7824 "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-". 7825 7826 - For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the 7827 value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``. 7828 7829 - For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the 7830 variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``. 7831 7832 :term:`TARGET_SYS` 7833 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 7834 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 7835 current recipe. 7836 7837 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 7838 on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, 7839 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and 7840 :term:`TARGET_OS` variables. 7841 7842 .. note:: 7843 7844 You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself. 7845 7846 Consider these two examples: 7847 7848 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the 7849 value is "i686-linux". 7850 7851 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target 7852 running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 7853 7854 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR` 7855 Specifies the name of the target vendor. 7856 7857 :term:`TCLIBC` 7858 Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during 7859 the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no 7860 longer supported. 7861 7862 You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal" 7863 7864 :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND` 7865 Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the 7866 :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the 7867 ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple 7868 variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this 7869 mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept 7870 separate to avoid potential conflicts. 7871 7872 In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of 7873 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky, 7874 which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set 7875 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting 7876 in no suffix being applied. 7877 7878 :term:`TCMODE` 7879 Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the 7880 characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the 7881 OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default, 7882 the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The 7883 variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal 7884 toolchain. 7885 7886 .. note:: 7887 7888 If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your 7889 responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the 7890 default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these 7891 components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for 7892 the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which 7893 the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go 7894 to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>` 7895 page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE 7896 INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release. 7897 7898 The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`, 7899 which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``) 7900 used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``. 7901 7902 With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external 7903 toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for 7904 this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics 7905 ``meta-sourcery`` layer at 7906 https://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/. 7907 7908 The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the 7909 Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must 7910 be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of 7911 the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable 7912 in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed 7913 the toolchain. 7914 7915 The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external 7916 toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding 7917 support for other external toolchains. 7918 7919 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR` 7920 The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when 7921 the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set 7922 to "1". 7923 7924 The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to 7925 ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``. 7926 7927 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` 7928 Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you 7929 do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a 7930 manner that you to run them outside of the build system. 7931 7932 :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR` 7933 Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The 7934 ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``. 7935 7936 .. note:: 7937 7938 Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``), 7939 which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory. 7940 7941 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` 7942 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7943 control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this 7944 command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action 7945 (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified 7946 command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or 7947 "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then 7948 power on) the device, respectively. 7949 7950 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 7951 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 7952 pass through to the command specified in 7953 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 7954 ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 7955 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 7956 non-machine-specific parts of the arguments. 7957 7958 :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT` 7959 The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated 7960 runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout 7961 period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500 7962 seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf`` 7963 file. 7964 7965 For more information on testing images, see the 7966 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 7967 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7968 7969 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD` 7970 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7971 connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This 7972 command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward 7973 that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal 7974 program does. 7975 7976 For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device 7977 ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows: 7978 :: 7979 7980 TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200" 7981 7982 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 7983 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 7984 pass through to the command specified in 7985 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 7986 ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 7987 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 7988 non-machine-specific parts of the command. 7989 7990 :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP` 7991 The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address 7992 is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this 7993 variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e. 7994 where the build is taking place). 7995 7996 .. note:: 7997 7998 The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of 7999 tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages 8000 from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``. 8001 8002 :term:`TEST_SUITES` 8003 An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when 8004 performing automated runtime testing. 8005 8006 The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can 8007 be used against images. 8008 8009 .. note:: 8010 8011 Currently, there is only support for running these tests under 8012 QEMU. 8013 8014 Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add 8015 your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as 8016 follows: 8017 :: 8018 8019 TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest" 8020 8021 Alternatively, you can 8022 provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against 8023 the image. 8024 :: 8025 8026 TEST_SUITES_append = " auto" 8027 8028 Using this option causes the 8029 build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the 8030 image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped. 8031 8032 The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on 8033 another test must appear later in the list than the test on which 8034 they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two 8035 tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on 8036 ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows: 8037 :: 8038 8039 TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B" 8040 8041 For more information on testing images, see the 8042 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8043 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8044 8045 :term:`TEST_TARGET` 8046 Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a 8047 test image. The default controller to use is "qemu": 8048 :: 8049 8050 TEST_TARGET = "qemu" 8051 8052 A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets 8053 deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend 8054 the controllers by adding a module in the layer's 8055 ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the 8056 ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used 8057 as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``. 8058 8059 You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``: 8060 8061 - *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the 8062 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section 8063 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 8064 information. 8065 8066 - *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is 8067 already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it 8068 can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set 8069 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use 8070 "simpleremote". 8071 8072 .. note:: 8073 8074 This argument is defined in 8075 ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``. 8076 8077 For information on running tests on hardware, see the 8078 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`" 8079 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8080 8081 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` 8082 The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP`` 8083 variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is 8084 set to "qemu". 8085 8086 When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is 8087 an example: 8088 :: 8089 8090 TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201" 8091 8092 Specifying a port is 8093 useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when 8094 your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not 8095 directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address 8096 translation. 8097 8098 :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO` 8099 Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an 8100 image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes 8101 any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU. 8102 Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for 8103 which testing is requested is automatically built first. 8104 8105 These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest`` 8106 module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system 8107 over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` 8108 file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the 8109 OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an 8110 image successfully builds: 8111 8112 TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1" 8113 8114 For more information 8115 on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the 8116 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8117 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the 8118 ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section. 8119 8120 :term:`THISDIR` 8121 The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is 8122 located. Do not manually set this variable. 8123 8124 :term:`TIME` 8125 The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute, 8126 and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine 8127 seconds past 1400 hours). 8128 8129 :term:`TMPDIR` 8130 This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system 8131 uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the 8132 shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to 8133 ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`. 8134 8135 If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the 8136 default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the 8137 ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`: 8138 :: 8139 8140 #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp" 8141 8142 An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk, 8143 which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS. 8144 8145 The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem 8146 semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and 8147 persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some 8148 implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement. 8149 Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS. 8150 8151 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK` 8152 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8153 building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The 8154 packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set 8155 that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each 8156 package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example, 8157 consider the following command when building an SDK: 8158 :: 8159 8160 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 8161 8162 In this case, a default list of packages is 8163 set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the 8164 list. See the 8165 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8166 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8167 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8168 8169 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8170 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8171 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8172 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8173 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8174 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8175 8176 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` 8177 This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The 8178 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets 8179 the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows: 8180 :: 8181 8182 TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}" 8183 8184 See 8185 the :term:`SDK_NAME` and 8186 :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional 8187 information. 8188 8189 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK` 8190 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8191 it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the 8192 target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this 8193 variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs 8194 on the target. See the 8195 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8196 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8197 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8198 8199 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8200 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8201 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8202 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8203 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8204 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8205 8206 :term:`TOPDIR` 8207 The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake 8208 automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build 8209 environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`. 8210 8211 :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH` 8212 A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This 8213 variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where 8214 underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In 8215 this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in 8216 ``TARGET_ARCH``. 8217 8218 Do not edit this variable. 8219 8220 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` 8221 The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e. 8222 ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses 8223 this value to setup configuration. 8224 8225 ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The 8226 definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically 8227 adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at 8228 the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the 8229 ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the 8230 :term:`Source Directory` provides information for 8231 ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture. 8232 8233 ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to 8234 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target 8235 machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file 8236 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows: 8237 :: 8238 8239 TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}" 8240 8241 The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures 8242 are configurable, shows supported machine architectures: 8243 8244 - arm 8245 - i586 8246 - x86_64 8247 - powerpc 8248 - powerpc64 8249 - mips 8250 - mipsel 8251 8252 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` 8253 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 8254 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8255 ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8256 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8257 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8258 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8259 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8260 :: 8261 8262 TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}" 8263 8264 .. note:: 8265 8266 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8267 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8268 supply its own set of flags). 8269 8270 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` 8271 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 8272 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8273 ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8274 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8275 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 8276 8277 .. note:: 8278 8279 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8280 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8281 supply its own set of flags). 8282 8283 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES` 8284 Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific 8285 processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow 8286 arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on 8287 the features. 8288 8289 The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they 8290 are not conflicting and that they are supported. 8291 8292 The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines 8293 ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows: 8294 :: 8295 8296 TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}" 8297 8298 See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information. 8299 8300 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` 8301 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 8302 The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8303 ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8304 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8305 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8306 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8307 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8308 :: 8309 8310 TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}" 8311 8312 .. note:: 8313 8314 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8315 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8316 supply its own set of flags). 8317 8318 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` 8319 The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define 8320 the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific 8321 tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows: 8322 :: 8323 8324 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune" 8325 8326 These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine 8327 include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in 8328 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file: 8329 :: 8330 8331 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32" 8332 8333 :term:`TUNEABI` 8334 An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular 8335 tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt 8336 libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``, 8337 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and 8338 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check 8339 compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries. 8340 8341 If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the 8342 :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is 8343 used. 8344 8345 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE` 8346 If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the 8347 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable. 8348 Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the 8349 ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and 8350 :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a 8351 tuning against their selection of libraries. 8352 8353 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8354 variable is used. 8355 8356 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` 8357 A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If 8358 ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers 8359 that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, 8360 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI`` 8361 variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection 8362 of libraries. 8363 8364 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8365 variable is used. 8366 8367 :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]` 8368 Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features 8369 that conflict with feature. 8370 8371 Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in 8372 the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from 8373 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file 8374 that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32" 8375 feature: 8376 :: 8377 8378 TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64" 8379 8380 :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]` 8381 Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning 8382 feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features 8383 are specified in the machine include files (e.g. 8384 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example 8385 from that file: 8386 :: 8387 8388 TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode." 8389 8390 See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory` 8391 for these features. 8392 8393 :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG` 8394 Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can 8395 also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual 8396 cases. 8397 8398 Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. :: 8399 8400 UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd" 8401 UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard" 8402 UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config" 8403 UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs" 8404 UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config" 8405 8406 In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the 8407 ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines 8408 "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the 8409 "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-Boot image. 8410 8411 For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the 8412 :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>` 8413 class. 8414 8415 :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS` 8416 Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-Boot. During FIT 8417 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8418 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify 8419 the load address to be used in 8420 creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8421 8422 :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS` 8423 Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-Boot. During FIT 8424 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8425 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in 8426 creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8427 8428 :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT` 8429 Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8430 creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a 8431 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8432 8433 :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS` 8434 Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8435 creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a 8436 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8437 8438 :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION` 8439 Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot 8440 image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built 8441 was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be 8442 "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement: 8443 :: 8444 8445 UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto" 8446 8447 :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` 8448 Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building 8449 a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform 8450 configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine 8451 configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``). 8452 8453 Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type" 8454 section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable. 8455 8456 :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET` 8457 Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target 8458 is "all". 8459 8460 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE` 8461 Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the 8462 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to assemble 8463 the FIT image. This can be used to substitute an alternative command, wrapper 8464 script or function if desired. The default is "uboot-mkimage". 8465 8466 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS` 8467 Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D' 8468 feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class. 8469 If ``UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS`` is not set then kernel-fitimage will not 8470 pass the ``-D`` option to mkimage. 8471 8472 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN` 8473 Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the 8474 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to sign 8475 the FIT image after it has been assembled (if enabled). This can be used 8476 to substitute an alternative command, wrapper script or function if 8477 desired. The default is "${:term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE`}". 8478 8479 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN_ARGS` 8480 Optionally specifies additional arguments for the 8481 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to pass to the 8482 mkimage command when signing the FIT image. 8483 8484 :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT` 8485 Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image. 8486 During FIT image creation, the 8487 ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used 8488 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8489 entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8490 the FIT image. 8491 8492 :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS` 8493 Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image. 8494 During FIT image creation, the 8495 ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used 8496 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8497 load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8498 the FIT image. 8499 8500 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE` 8501 Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0". 8502 8503 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` 8504 Location of the directory containing the RSA key and 8505 certificate used for signing FIT image. 8506 8507 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` 8508 The name of keys used for signing U-Boot FIT image stored in 8509 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt 8510 certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have 8511 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev". 8512 8513 :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX` 8514 Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb`` 8515 has a ``.sb`` extension. 8516 8517 The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin`` 8518 8519 :term:`UBOOT_TARGET` 8520 Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed 8521 directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do 8522 not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process 8523 passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building 8524 process. 8525 8526 :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST` 8527 Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script 8528 as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the 8529 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid 8530 configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g. 8531 should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 8532 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`). 8533 However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all 8534 configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some 8535 configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a 8536 warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added 8537 to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``. 8538 8539 The configure arguments check that uses 8540 ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the 8541 :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the 8542 recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class. 8543 8544 :term:`UPDATERCPN` 8545 For recipes inheriting the 8546 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN`` 8547 specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled. 8548 8549 The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that 8550 install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe, 8551 you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes. 8552 8553 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX` 8554 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8555 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8556 the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the 8557 OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by 8558 picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags. 8559 8560 You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a 8561 regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the 8562 default filter not work correctly. 8563 :: 8564 8565 UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex" 8566 8567 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX` 8568 Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different 8569 regular expression instead of the default one when the package 8570 checking system is parsing the page found using 8571 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`. 8572 :: 8573 8574 UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex" 8575 8576 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI` 8577 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8578 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8579 the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is 8580 determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and 8581 attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work, 8582 you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that 8583 contains the link to the latest tarball. 8584 :: 8585 8586 UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url" 8587 8588 :term:`USE_DEVFS` 8589 Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The 8590 default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is 8591 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a 8592 statically populated ``/dev`` directory. 8593 8594 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in 8595 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to 8596 use this variable. 8597 8598 :term:`USE_VT` 8599 When using 8600 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 8601 determines whether or not to run a 8602 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any 8603 virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those 8604 terminals. 8605 8606 The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is 8607 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the 8608 machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical 8609 display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal 8610 functionality. 8611 8612 :term:`USER_CLASSES` 8613 A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the 8614 OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g. 8615 ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth). 8616 8617 The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file: 8618 :: 8619 8620 USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink" 8621 8622 For more information, see 8623 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 8624 8625 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` 8626 If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce 8627 an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group 8628 identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files 8629 listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8630 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to 8631 ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead. 8632 8633 The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply 8634 ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the 8635 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan 8636 on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should 8637 set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf`` 8638 file as follows: 8639 :: 8640 8641 USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error" 8642 8643 Overriding the 8644 default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set 8645 static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the 8646 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`, 8647 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and 8648 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8649 8650 .. note:: 8651 8652 There is a difference in behavior between setting 8653 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``. 8654 When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for 8655 every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set 8656 to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually 8657 built. 8658 This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you 8659 know will never be built. 8660 8661 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` 8662 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group 8663 identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8664 adds a group to the system during package installation. 8665 8666 When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the 8667 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8668 ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8669 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8670 :: 8671 8672 8673 USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group" 8674 8675 .. note:: 8676 8677 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8678 causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values. 8679 8680 :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES` 8681 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8682 this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe 8683 that require users and/or groups to be added. 8684 8685 You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For 8686 example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in 8687 a recipe: 8688 :: 8689 8690 USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}" 8691 8692 .. note:: 8693 8694 It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES`` 8695 variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`, 8696 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables. 8697 8698 :term:`USERADD_PARAM` 8699 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8700 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to 8701 the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the 8702 package is installed. 8703 8704 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 8705 :: 8706 8707 USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \ 8708 --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \ 8709 --user-group messagebus" 8710 8711 For information on the 8712 standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see 8713 https://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd. 8714 8715 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` 8716 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user 8717 identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8718 adds a user to the system during package installation. 8719 8720 When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the 8721 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8722 ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8723 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8724 :: 8725 8726 USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd" 8727 8728 .. note:: 8729 8730 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8731 causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values. 8732 8733 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` 8734 When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system 8735 to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and 8736 ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`. 8737 8738 To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification 8739 (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` 8740 file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids" 8741 8742 .. note:: 8743 8744 Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` 8745 values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the 8746 :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class. 8747 8748 If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also 8749 specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the 8750 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8751 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8752 Additionally, you should also set the 8753 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable. 8754 8755 :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR` 8756 Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory, 8757 which is used to house postinstall target log files. 8758 8759 By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the 8760 file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the 8761 variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent. 8762 8763 :term:`WARN_QA` 8764 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 8765 warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 8766 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 8767 can control with this variable, see the 8768 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 8769 8770 :term:`WKS_FILE` 8771 Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the 8772 OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image 8773 (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned 8774 image, see the 8775 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 8776 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on 8777 the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" Chapter. 8778 8779 :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS` 8780 When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists 8781 build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only 8782 applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when 8783 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related 8784 to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has 8785 no effect. 8786 8787 The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the 8788 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in 8789 your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the 8790 ``WIC_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable. 8791 8792 With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to 8793 specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools, 8794 bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images. 8795 Following is an example: 8796 :: 8797 8798 WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool" 8799 8800 In the 8801 previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual 8802 native tool on which the build would depend. 8803 8804 :term:`WORKDIR` 8805 The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build 8806 system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the 8807 :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to 8808 the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built. 8809 8810 The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows: 8811 :: 8812 8813 ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR} 8814 8815 The actual directory depends on several things: 8816 8817 - :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory 8818 - :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier 8819 - :term:`PN`: The recipe name 8820 - :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which 8821 is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank) 8822 - :term:`PV`: The recipe version 8823 - :term:`PR`: The recipe revision 8824 8825 As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name 8826 ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a 8827 ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose 8828 your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work 8829 directory the build system uses to build the package would be as 8830 follows: 8831 :: 8832 8833 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0 8834 8835 :term:`XSERVER` 8836 Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X 8837 server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image 8838 directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps 8839 indirectly, includes "x11-base" in 8840 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 8841 8842 The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine 8843 configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev". 8844 8845